rn technical manual

315
RISO INTERNATIONAL GROUP RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION (JAPAN) RISO DEUTSCHLAND GMBH (GERMANY) RISO, INC. (U.S.A.) RISO FRANCE (FRANCE) RISO EUROPE LIMITED (U.K.) RISO IBERICA (SPAIN) RISO HONG KONG (HONG KONG) RISO CANADA (CANADA) RISO UK (U.K.) RISO ZHUHAI (HONG KONG) RISO THAILAND LIMITED (THAILAND) RISO AFRICA (SOUTH AFRICA) Copyright : 2000 Riso Kagaku Corporation All Rights Reserved. This Technical Manual was prepared and written for the exclusive use of RISO International Group Certified Dealers. Reproduction and/or transmittal of this material in any form or by any means, including photocopying or recording of the information is strictly prohibited without the consent of a member of RISO International Group. VERSION 1.0 JULY, 2000 RN SERIES TECHNICAL MANUAL

Upload: kershnee-govender

Post on 08-Sep-2014

2.571 views

Category:

Documents


29 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: RN Technical Manual

RISO INTERNATIONAL GROUP

RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION (JAPAN) RISO DEUTSCHLAND GMBH (GERMANY)RISO, INC. (U.S.A.) RISO FRANCE (FRANCE)RISO EUROPE LIMITED (U.K.) RISO IBERICA (SPAIN)RISO HONG KONG (HONG KONG) RISO CANADA (CANADA)RISO UK (U.K.) RISO ZHUHAI (HONG KONG)RISO THAILAND LIMITED (THAILAND) RISO AFRICA (SOUTH AFRICA)

Copyright : 2000 Riso Kagaku CorporationAll Rights Reserved. This Technical Manual was preparedand written for the exclusive use of RISO International GroupCertified Dealers. Reproduction and/or transmittal of thismaterial in any form or by any means, including photocopyingor recording of the information is strictly prohibited without theconsent of a member of RISO International Group.

VERSION 1.0JULY, 2000

RNSERIES

TECHNICAL MANUAL

Page 2: RN Technical Manual

IndeIndeIndeIndeIndexxxxx

Chapter 1 Maintenance

Chapter 2 Machine Summary

Chapter 3 Machine Drive Section

Chapter 4 First Paper Feed Section

Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section

Chapter 6 Press Section

Chapter 7 Paper Ejection System

Chapter 8 Print Drum Section

Chapter 9 Master Clamp Section

Chapter 10 Master Removal Section

Chapter 11 F.B. Original Scanning Section

Chapter 12 A.D.F. Original Scanning Section

Chapter 13 Master Making Section

Chapter 14 Timing Charts

Chapter 15 Panel Messages

Chapter 16 Test Modes

Chapter 17 User Mode Settings

Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Precautions

Chapter 19 Description of P.C.B’s

Page 3: RN Technical Manual

1 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1: MAINTENANCE

Contents

1. Preface ......................................................................................................................1-2

CAUTION...................................................................................................................1-3

WARNING .................................................................................................................1-4

2. Work Precautions .....................................................................................................1-5

3. Exterior Cover Removal ............................................................................................1-8

4. Controller (RISORINC2) and System PCB ........................................................... 1-13

Page 4: RN Technical Manual

1 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

1. PrefaceThis manual provides Technical Service Information for the RISOGRAPH model RN series.

This manual is published as a reference guide for use by RISO Group (RISO Kagaku Corp./RISO,INC./RISO EUROPE Ltd.) Certified Technical Representatives experienced in duplicator repairand service.

This manual also provides procedures for removing and installing major components. Following theseprocedures will minimize machine malfunctions. This information and format will also increasetechnical representatives' awareness and experience regarding repairs necessary to insure end-usersatisfaction.

PREFACE

Page 5: RN Technical Manual

1 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

[Handling of Lithium Battery]

- Never fail to follow the following instructions when you discard the usedlithium battery.

1. Never let the battery short-circuited.If the (+) and (-) terminals contact each other or metal materials, the battery willbe short-circuited. If the batteries are collected and stored inorderly or one uponanother, the above-mentioned case will occur.

- DANGER -If the battery is short-circuited, it will heat up and may in some cases explode intofire.

2. Never heat up the battery.- DANGER -

If you heat the battery up to more than 100°C or put it into the fire, it may burndangerously or explode.

3. Never disassemble the battery or press it into deformation.- DANGER -

If you disassemble the battery, the gas pouring out of the inside may hurt yourthroat or the negative lithium may heat up into fire.If the battery is pressed into deformation, the liquid inside may leak out of thesealed part or the battery may be short-circuited inside an explode.

4. Never fail to keep the battery out of reach of children.If you put the battery within reach of children, they may swallow it down.Should they swallow the battery, immediately consult the doctor.

[Replacement of the Lithium Battery]

1. The lithium battery must be replaced by a trained and authorized servicetechnician.

2. The battery must be replaced only with the same or equivalent typerecom- mended by the manufacturer.

3. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

CAUTION

CAUTION

Page 6: RN Technical Manual

1 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

!! WARNING !!

Important Safety Precautions

1. Always disconnect electrical supply before placing hands in themachine.

I. To avoid injuries:Be sure to disconnect the electrical power before disassembling, assembling,or whenmaking adjustments on the machine.

II. Protection of the machine:Make sure to turn OFF the power to the machine before plugging or unplugging theelectrical connectors, or when connecting a Meter.

2. Always connect electrical connectors firmly.

I. To avoid electrical failure:The connectors must be connected firmly together and onto the PCBs.Press on the ends of the connectors and then on the middle to ensure a firm fit.

II. Protection of the electrical components:The electrical components may be damaged due to short circuits caused by a looseconnector.

Wire harness connector

FIRST

THEN

Press the ends.

Press the center, firmly.

WARNING

Page 7: RN Technical Manual

1 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

WORK PRECAUTIONS

2. Work PrecautionsInspection

If you discover any defects or problems during an inspection, fix the problems or if necessary takesteps such as replacing a part.

RemovalCheck the problem area. At the same time, examine the cause of the problem and determinewhether the part needs to be removed or disassembled. Next proceed according to the proce-dures presented in the Technical Manual. In cases where, for example, it is necessary to disas-semble areas with large numbers of parts, parts which are similar to each other, or parts which arethe same on the left and right, sort the parts so that you do not mix them up during reassembly.(1) Carefully sort the removed parts.(2) Distinguish between parts which are being replaced and those which will be reused.(3) When replacing screws, etc., be sure to use the

specified sizes.

Assembly and InstallationUnless specified otherwise, perform the removal proce-dures in reverse during assembly and installation. Incases where protrusions or holes are provided to assistin positioning parts, use them for accurate positioningand securing.(Protrusions and holes for positioning parts Halfpierce section)

ToolsUsing tools other than those specified can lead to injuryor damage screws and parts. Have all the tools neces-sary for the work available.

<Standard Tool list>

Type Tip size Shaft length, etc.

No. 2 (250 mm)No. 2 (100 mm-150 mm)No. 2 (stubby type)No. 1 (75 mm-100 mm)

6 mm (100 mm-150 mm)3 mm (100 mm-150 mm)

1.8 mm (precision type)

8 mm (100 mm-150 mm)7 mm (100 mm-150 mm)

2.5 mm

5 mm 5.5 mm 7 mm8 mm 10 mm 13 mm

Monkey

5.0 mm4.0 mm3.0 mm2.5 mm2.0 mm1.5 mm

Phillips screwdriver

Standard screwdriver

Nut driver(box driver)

High frequency driver

Spanners(may be double-ended)

Hex wrenches

Type Remarks

Steel scale 150 mm

Feeler gauge

Radial cutting pliers

Pliers

Nipper

Small flashlight

Multimeter

Soldering iron 20 W-30 W

File Flat, round

- ( 2 pieces required )

Page 8: RN Technical Manual

1 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

Electrical system work• After removing wire bundles, fasten them

with wire bundle bands (bar lock ties) sothat they will not sag.

• When installing parts, be careful to avoidpinching or damaging the wire bundles.

• If a fuse blows, always replace it with onewith the specified capacity. Using a fusewith a larger capacity can not only dam-age parts, but may cause fires.

• Be careful not to drop image scanners,thermal print heads, and other sensorsas they can be easily damaged.

Switch types• Microswitches may be divided between nor-

mally open (NO) types and normally closed(NC) types.With an NO connection, an internal con-tact is connected when the switch actua-tor is pressed.With an NC connection, an internal con-tact is disconnected when the switch ac-tuator is pressed.

• Magnetic lead switches are switches inwhich an internal contact is connectedin reaction to the magnetic force of amagnet.

Sensor types• Photo-electric sensors may be broadly

divided into the following four types: in-terrupt types (U-shaped), actuator types,reflective types, and transmittive types.

• Magnetic sensors use Hall ICs, which re-act to the magnetic force in magnets.

• Always turn off the power before pluggingor unplugging sensor connectors.

WORK PRECAUTIONS

Page 9: RN Technical Manual

1 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

Installation location• Do not install the machine in any of the following locations.(1) Those subject to direct sunlight or any bright location such as by a window (If you must

install in such a location, put a curtain or the like over the window.)(2) Those where the temperature changes drastically(3) Those that are too hot, cold, humid, or dry

RECOMMENDED:Temperature range: 15° centigrade - 30° centigradeHumidity range: 40% - 70% No condensation allowed

(4) Those with radiant heat sources and any locations in the direct path of air from air condition-ers, heaters

(5) Any poorly ventilated location(6) Dusty atmosphere(7) Any tilted location

(Installation height difference: 10 mm max. front - rear, 10 mm max. left - right)

Electrical connection• Plug the plug securely into the socket so that there is no problem with the contact in the power

supply plug section.• Do not use any triplets or extension cords.• Do not allow any other machine to stand on or crush the power cord.

Ground connection• Always ground this machine to prevent electrical shock in the unlikely event of electrical

leakage.

WORK PRECAUTIONS

Page 10: RN Technical Manual

1 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

3. Exterior Cover Removal1. Bring the Print Cylinder to Position-A and remove the Print Cylinder from the machine.2. Turn off the power and remove the power cord from the machine.

FRONT COVERRemove mounting screws (M4x8: 2 pcs) from the Hinge, and remove the Hinge.

The Front Cover comes off the machine.

Front cover Hinge

FRONT FRAME COVERRemove mounting screws (M4x8: 7 pcs) and remove the Front Frame Cover.

Front frame cover

EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

Page 11: RN Technical Manual

1 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

REAR COVERRemove mounting screws (M3x5: 2pcs) of the Connector Lock of the Controller and open theConnector Locks flat against the Controller.

Remove screws (M4x8: 4 pcs) and remove the Rear Cover.

Rear cover

Connector lock

MASTER REMOVAL LOWER COVERRemove the Master Disposal Box.

Remove screws (M4x8: 4 pcs) and remove the Master Removal Lower Cover.

Master removal lower cover

Page 12: RN Technical Manual

1 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

STAGE COVERRemove mounting screw (M4x10: 1 pc) from each of the two Hinges of the Stage Cover, and then asshown on the photograph, attach those screws in the secrew holes behind.

Remove screw (M4x8: 1 pc) on the Scanner Unit Cover (rear) to detach the Ground Wire from themachine, and then lift the Stage Cover off the machine.

Stage cover

Ground wire

Hinge Scanner Unit Cover (rear)

Page 13: RN Technical Manual

1 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

SCANNER UNIT COVER (LEFT)Remove mounting screw (M4x8: 4 pcs) and remove the Scanner Unit Cover (left).

Scanner unit cover (left)

SCANNER UNIT COVER (REAR)Remove the Stage Cover.

Remove mounting screw (M4x8: 4 pcs) and remove the Scanner Unit Cover (rear).

Scanner unit cover (rear)

EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

Page 14: RN Technical Manual

1 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

SCANNER UNIT COVER (FRONT)Remove mounting screw (M4x8: 3 pcs) and remove the Scanner Unit Cover (front).

EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

Scanner unit cover (front)

SCANNER UNIT COVER (RIGHT)Remove Scanner Unit Cover (front) and Scanner Unit Cover (rear).

Remove mounting screw (M4x8: 2 pcs) and remove the Scanner Unit Cover (right).

Scanner unit cover (right)

Page 15: RN Technical Manual

1 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

4. Controller (RISORINC2) and SYSTEM PCB

CONTROLLER (RISORINC2)Remove the Rear Cover.

Disconnect three connectors from the Controller (1 on the top and 2 on the bottom of the Controller).

Remove screws (M3x6: 2 pcs), and pull the Controller a little bit to the front, just enough to clear thehalf-pierce, and slide the Controller out of the machine.

[Precautions on Reassembly]

Place the Controller on top of the System PCB Support Bracket A, and push it in.

Half-pierce

Controller

(RISORINC2)

System PCB support bracket A

Page 16: RN Technical Manual

1 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

SYSTEM PCBRemove the Rear Cover.

Remove screws (M3x5: 1 pc), and remove the Wire Harness Support Plate.

Disconnect all the Connectors from the System PCB, remove screws (M3x5: 6 pcs), and then removethe System PCB together with the System PCB Support Bracket B.

[Precautions on Reassembly]

Attach the Wire Harness Support Plate while pushing it down against the wire harness (flat cable) tohold the wire harness firmly in position.

Wire harness support plate

Flat cable (wire harness)

Page 17: RN Technical Manual

1 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

SYSTEM PCB SUPPORT BRACKET AUnplug the connector of the FB Junction Wire Harness from the Junction COnnector, and then detachthe Junction Connector from the System PCB Support Bracket A.

Remove seven Snap Bands from the System PCB Support Bracket A.

Remove screws (M4x6: 5 pcs) and detach the System PCB Support Bracket from the machine.

EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL

Snap band FB Junction Wire HarnessJunction Connector

System PCB support bracket A

Snap band

Snap band

Page 18: RN Technical Manual

1 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 1. MAINTENANCE

[Memo]

Page 19: RN Technical Manual

2 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 2: MACHINE SUMMARY

Contents

1. Specifications (Metric Model) ....................................................................................1-2

2. Specifications (Inch Model) ......................................................................................1-6

Page 20: RN Technical Manual

2 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY

1. Specifications (Metric Model)

SPECIFICATIONS (METRIC MODEL)

Reference only

Page 21: RN Technical Manual

2 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY

SPECIFICATIONS (METRIC MODEL)

Reference only

Page 22: RN Technical Manual

2 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY

SPECIFICATIONS (METRIC MODEL)

Reference only

Page 23: RN Technical Manual

2 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY

SPECIFICATIONS (METRIC MODEL)

Reference only

Page 24: RN Technical Manual

2 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY

SPECIFICATIONS (INCH MODEL)

2. Specifications (Inch Model)Reference only

Not available to U.S.A.(U.S.A. has RN2000 designed only for Letter size)

Page 25: RN Technical Manual

2 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 2. MACHINE SUMMARY

SPECIFICATIONS (INCH MODEL)

Reference only

Page 26: RN Technical Manual

3 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 3: MAIN DRIVE SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................3-2

1. Main Drive Section ....................................................................................................3-2

2. Main Motor Safety Mechanism ..................................................................................3-3

3. Print Drum Position Check Mechanism ...................................................................3-4

Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................3-6

1. Removing the Main Motor Unit ..................................................................................3-6

2. Removing the Flat Bed Set Switch ...........................................................................3-8

3. Removing the Print Drum Safety Switch ...................................................................3-9

Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 3-10

1. Print Drum Position-A Adjustment ......................................................................... 3-10

Page 27: RN Technical Manual

3 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION

MAIN DRIVE SECTION

Mechanism

1. Main Drive Section

When the Main motor [A] is turned on, the Main pulley [B] rotates and the rotation is transmitted to the Printdrum pulley [D] via the Main belt [C].

The Main motor encoder sensor [E] detects the speed and position of the main motor [A].

A: Main motor

B: Main pulley

C: Main belt

D: Print drum pulley

E: Main motor encoder sensor

B

C

D

A

E

Page 28: RN Technical Manual

3 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION

MAIN MOTOR SAFETY MECHANISM

2. Main Motor Safety Mechanism

Two safety switches (Flat bed set switch [A] and Print drum safety switch [B]) prevent the motor from beingturned on if parts are not positioned.

A: Flat bed set switch

B: Print drum safety switch

B

A

Page 29: RN Technical Manual

3 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION

PRINT DRUM POSITION CHECK MECHANISM

3. Print Drum Position Check Mechanism

The print drum’s rotation position is detected by the Main motor encoder sensor referenced to the positionA detected by the Position A sensor [A] on the machine and Position A detection plate [B] on the printdrum.

The encoder counts 2933 pulses for each revolution of the print drum.

A: Position A sensor

B: Position A detection plate

A

B

Page 30: RN Technical Manual

3 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION

[Memo]

Page 31: RN Technical Manual

3 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION

REMOVING THE MAIN MOTOR UNIT

Removal and Assembly

1. Removing the Main Motor Unit

(1) Position the print drum at position A, turn off the power, and then remove the following covers andcomponents.

• Front door

• Front cover

• Rear cover

• Controller

• Main PCB

• Print positioning unit

(2) Reduce the tension on the Paper feed timing belt [A].

• Loosen the retaining screws on the Idler A ass’y [B].

(3) Reduce the tension on the Main belt [C].

• Loosen the retaining screws on the Idler B ass’y [D].

• Loosen the retaining screw [L] on the Idler C ass’y [E], and then remove the mounting screw [M].

* Do not remove the retaining screw [L] on the Idler C ass’y [E].

(4) Remove the Paper feed timing belt [A] and Main belt [C] from the Main pulley [F].

(5) Unplug one wire harness connector from slot No. CN403 of the Drive PCB, and another wire harnessconnector at the rear of the machine, close to the Print positioning unit. Then remove the mountingscrews (M4 x 8: 6 pcs), and remove the Main motor unit [G].

D

F

E

B

A

C

G

Page 32: RN Technical Manual

3 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Tension the main belt by aligning the position-A alignment hole [J] on the print drum with the main-pulley position-A alignment hole [K] and then turning the Idler C ass’y [E] counter-clockwise to applytension on the Main belt [C] and lock its position. Apply further tension on the Main belt [C] by turningthe Idler B ass’y [D] clockwise.

A: Paper feed timing belt

B: Idler A ass’y

C: Main belt

D: Idler B ass’y

E: Idler C ass’y

F: Main pulley

G: Main motor unit

H: Main motor encoder sensor

I: Main motor

J: Print drum pulley “position-A” alignment hole

K: Main-pulley position-A alignment hole

L: Idler C ass’y retaining screw

M: Idler C ass’y mounting screw

REMOVING THE MAIN MOTOR UNIT

Main motor unit

F

HIEL M

E

D

J

K

Page 33: RN Technical Manual

3 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION

2. Removing the Flat Bed Set Switch

(1) Pull out the print drum and remove the covers.

• Front door

• Front cover

(2) Unplug the connector [C], remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs), and then remove the entireFlat bed set switch cover [A].

(3) Remove the E-ring, remove the Torsion spring [E], and then remove the Flat bed set switch [B]together with the sensor bracket [D].

(4) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 14: 2 pcs) and remove the Flat bed set switch [B].

REMOVING THE FLAT BED SET SWITCH

A: Flat bed set switch cover

B: Flat bed set switch

C: Connector

D: Sensor bracket

E: Torsion spring

A

B

C

A

BD

E

Page 34: RN Technical Manual

3 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION

REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM SAFETY SWITCH

3. Removing the Print Drum Safety Switch

(1) Pull out the print drum.

(2) Remove the covers.

• Front door

• Front cover

(3) Remove the Print drum safety switch cover [B]. (M4 x 6: 2 pcs)

(4) Unplug the Connector [C], remove the mounting screws (M3 x 14: 2 pcs), and then remove the Printdrum safety switch [A].

A: Print drum safety switch

B: Print drum safety switch cover

C: Connector

A

B

C

AB

Page 35: RN Technical Manual

3 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 3. MAIN DRIVE SECTION

Adjustment

1. Print Drum Position-A Adjustment

Checking and adjustment procedure

(1) Pull out the print drum and return it back after removing the master attached to it.

(2) Open the Scanner table.

(3) Start the test mode, and run test mode No. 551 (set drum to position-A).

(4) Open the Master disposal gate housing, press down the Clamp open arm plate by hand, andcheck that it slots smoothly into the groove in the position-A Compensator plate without the printdrum moving.

(5) If it does not slot smoothly into the position-A Compensator plate or if the print drum moves, runtest mode No. 581 (position-A adjustment) to adjust position-A for the print drum. (On the settingprocedure, refer to Chapter 16: Test Mode.)

(6) Repeat from step (3) until correct print drum position-A is achieved.

PRINT DRUM POSITION-A ADJUSTMENT

Page 36: RN Technical Manual

4 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4: FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................4-2

1. Paper Feed Tray Mechanism ...................................................................................4-2

2. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism ...................................................................4-3

3. Paper Feed Tray Safety Mechanism .........................................................................4-4

4. First Paper Feed Drive Mechanism ..........................................................................4-5

5. Paper Strip Mechanism ............................................................................................4-6

6. Paper Feed Pressure Adjust Lever ..........................................................................4-7

Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................4-9

1. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Unit ........................................................................4-9

2. Removing the Paper Width Potentiometer, Paper DetectionSensor, and Paper Size Detection Sensor ............................................................ 4-10

3. Removing the Pickup and Scraper Rollers ........................................................... 4-12

4. Removing the Feed Tray Descent Button and Upper Limit Sensor ..................... 4-13

5. Removing the Paper Feed Clutch ......................................................................... 4-14

6. Removing the Pickup Roller Shaft Ass’y ............................................................... 4-15

7. Removing the Elevator Motor ................................................................................. 4-16

8. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Lower Safety Switch ........................................... 4-17

9. Removing the Stripper Unit ................................................................................... 4-18

10. Removing the Stripper Pad Ass’y .......................................................................... 4-19

Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 4-20

1. Upper Limit Sensor Position Adjustment ............................................................. 4-20

2. Stripper Unit Adjustment ........................................................................................ 4-21

3. Paper-Feed Clutch “ON” Timing Adjustment ........................................................ 4-22

4. Paper-Feed Clutch “OFF” Timing Adjustment ....................................................... 4-22

Page 37: RN Technical Manual

4 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

PAPER FEED TRAY MECHANISM

A: Paper feed tray

B: Adjustment dial

C: Paper size detection sensor

D: Paper width potentiometer

Mechanism

1. Paper Feed Tray Mechanism

1) Horizontal positioning (horizontal print positioning) of the paper feed trayThe Paper feed tray [A] can be moved ±10 mm left or right by turning the Adjustment dial [B] manually(for paper widths up to 274 mm, and ±5 mm for paper widths between 275 mm and 290 mm).

2) Print paper size detectionThe Paper feed tray [A] uses the Paper width potentiometer [D] and Paper size detection sensor [C] todetermine the size of the paper loaded in the Paper feed tray [A].

The Paper width potentiometer [D] checks the paper width, and the Paper size detection sensor [C]determines the paper length (portrait or landscape orientation).

BA

C

D

View of underside of the paper feed traywith the cover off

Page 38: RN Technical Manual

4 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

PAPER FEED TRAY ELEVATION MECHANISM

2. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism

The presence of paper loaded in the Paper feed tray [A] is detected by the Paper detection sensor [B].

When light is received at the Paper detection sensor [B] (paper present), pressing the START keyactivates the Elevator motor [E] and raises the Paper feed tray [A] until the Scraper assembly [C] blocksthe light beam of the Upper limit sensor [D].

During printing, the Elevator motor [E] is activated until the light to the upper limit sensor [D] is blocked.

When there is no longer paper in the Paper feed tray [A] and light is not received by the Paper detectionsensor [B], the Elevator motor [E] activates and lowers the Paper feed tray [A] until the light beam of theLower limit sensor [F] is blocked.

If the Feed tray descent button [G] is pressed while in print standby mode, the Elevator motor [E] activatesand lowers the Paper feed tray [A] until either the light beam of the Lower limit sensor [F] is blocked or theFeed tray descent button [G] is pressed once again.

The Elevator motor [E] does not operate even if the Feed tray descent button [G] is pressed while the printdrum is removed.

A: Paper feed tray

B: Paper detection sensor

C: Scraper assembly

D: Upper limit sensor

E: Elevator motor

F: Lower limit sensor

G: Feed tray descent button

A B F

E

DGC

Page 39: RN Technical Manual

4 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

PAPER FEED TRAY SAFETY MECHANISM

3. Paper Feed Tray Safety Mechanism

The Paper feed tray lower safety switch [C] ensures safety while the paper feed tray is being raised orlowered or is stationary.

If the Safety switch actuator plate [B] is depressed, the Paper feed tray lower safety switch [C] trips. Anerror in the paper feed tray is then assumed, and the machine stops.

A: Paper feed tray

B: Safety switch actuator plate

C: Paper feed tray lower safety switch

Press

A

C

B

B

Page 40: RN Technical Manual

4 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

FIRST PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM

4. First Paper Feed Drive Mechanism

When the printing operation commences, the Main motor [A] activates to rotate the print drum via the Mainbelt [C]. When the Main motor [A] is running, the Paper feed timing belt [D] continuously drives the pulleyon the Paper feed clutch [E].

When the print drum rotates through a preset angle (the angle set for paper feed clutch activation by testmode No. 481) from position A, the Paper feed clutch [E] is activated. The Scraper roller [G] and Pickuproller [H] rotate to feed the paper inside the machine from the paper feed tray.

The paper fed inside the machine blocks the light beam between Paper sensors [I] and [L]. The printdrum then rotates through a preset angle (the angle set for paper feed clutch deactivation angleadjustment by test mode Nos. 482 to 485), and the Paper feed clutch [E] is deactivated, completing thefirst stage paper feed.

The leading edge of the paper rests against the Guide roller [J] and Timing roller [M] and stops with thepaper bulging.

If the print drum rotates as far as the first paper feed jam detection angle after the Paper feed clutch [E]has been activated, Paper sensors [I] and [L] check to detect the presence or absence of paper.

After the paper has been fed to the second paper feed stage, a one-way clutch acts on the Scraper roller[G] and Pickup roller [H] so that they spin, to prevent the first paper feed area from applying brake on thepaper.

A: Main motor

B: Main pulley

C: Main belt

D: Paper feed timing belt

E: Paper feed clutch

F: Pickup roller shaft

G: Scraper roller

H: Pickup roller

I: Paper sensor (receive)

J: Guide roller

K: Stripper pad

L: Paper sensor (send)

M: Timing roller

A

B

D

C

F

E

G H I J

MLK

Page 41: RN Technical Manual

4 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

PAPER STRIP MECHANISM

5. Paper Strip Mechanism

The paper loaded in the paper feed tray is fed in between the Pickup roller [A] and Stripper pad [B] by therotating scraper roller. The paper is then separated by the Pickup roller [A] and Stripper pad [B] to ensurethat only the uppermost sheet is sent into the machine.

The Stripper pad [B] is pressed against the Pickup roller [A] by the force of the Stripper spring [C], and theresistance applied to the paper fed in separates the sheet.

The stripper-pad angle and stripping pressure can be adjusted by the user using the Stripper pad angleadjust knob [D] and Stripper pressure adjust knob[E].

A: Pickup roller

B: Stripper pad

C: Stripper spring

D: Stripper pad angle adjust knob

E: Stripper pressure adjust knob

A

B

C

E

D

Stripper pad angle adjust knob

Stripper pressure adjust knob

Page 42: RN Technical Manual

4 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

PAPER FEED PRESSURE ADJUST LEVER

6. Paper Feed Pressure Adjust Lever

The Paper feed pressure adjust lever [A] is located on the left-hand side of the scraper unit, and movingthis to the left or right switches the scraper-roller paper-feed pressure (scraper pressure) from NORMAL(weak) and CARD (strong).

Moving the pressure adjust lever to the right increases the paper-feed pressure (scraper pressure).

A: Pressure adjust lever

B: Pressure adjust lever spring

C: Pressure arm spring

D: Pressure arm

A B C D

Page 43: RN Technical Manual

4 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

[Memo]

Page 44: RN Technical Manual

4 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE PAPER FEED TRAY UNIT

Removal and Assembly

1. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Unit

(1) Lower the Paper feed tray [F] fully.

(2) Remove the rear cover.

(3) Unplug the connector [A] on the wire harness [B] from the Paper feed tray [F]. Remove the mountingscrew (M4 x 6: 1 pc) and remove the ground screw [D]. Cut the wire harness band [C], and then pullthe wire harness [B] towards the paper feed tray.

(4) Remove the E-rings [E] from the mountings on both sides of the paper feed tray, and remove thePaper feed tray [F].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• The wire harness on the paper feed tray must be secured with the harness band as before.

• Do not forget to attach the ground wire.

A: Connector

B: Wire harness

C: Wire harness band

D: Ground screw

E: E-ring

F: Paper feed tray

A B C E E

F

D

Page 45: RN Technical Manual

4 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

2. Removing the Paper Width Potentiometer, Paper DetectionSensor, and Paper Size Detection Sensor

(1) Remove the paper feed tray unit.

(2) Remove the E-ring and remove the Adjustment dial [A].

(3) Remove the E-rings [C] and bearings from both sides of the Slide shaft [B].

(4) Remove the shoulder screws (2 pcs) [D] and remove the paper-feed mounting plate [E].

(5) Remove the Paper-feed-tray bottom front cover [F] (mounting screws M4 x 6: 4 pcs) and Paper-feed-tray bottom rear cover [G] (mounting screws M3 x 8: 3 pcs).

(6) Unplug the connector and remove the Paper detection sensor [H] while expanding the mountingclips.

(7) Unplug the connector and remove the Paper size detection sensor [I] while expanding the mountingclips.

(8) Remove the mounting screws (mounting screws M3 x 8: 3 pcs), unplug the connector, and thenremove the Paper width potentiometer [K] together with the Potentiometer base [J].

REMOVING THE PAPER WIDTH POTENTIOMETER, PAPER DETECTION SENSOR, AND PAPER SIZE DETECTION SENSOR

A: Adjustment dial

B: Slide shaft

C: Bearing

D: Shoulder screw

E: Paper-feed mounting plate

J: Potentiometer base

K: Paper width potentiometer

L: Spur gear

M: Potentiometer shaft

F: Paper-feed-tray bottom front cover

G: Paper-feed-tray bottom rear cover

H: Paper detection sensor

I: Paper size detection sensor

A

B

D

C

F

E

G

Page 46: RN Technical Manual

4 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE PAPER WIDTH POTENTIOMETER, PAPER DETECTION SENSOR, AND PAPER SIZE DETECTION SENSOR

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• With the fence opened fully, mount the Spur gear [L] and the flat face of the potentiometer shaft [M]facing the printer body. (See photograph below.)

• Start test mode, and first set the fence position to 105 mm and activate test mode No. 450 (potenti-ometer adjustment 105 mm). Next, set the fence position to 210 mm and activate test mode No.451 (potentiometer adjustment 210 mm).

• After adjusting the potentiometer, check that each paper size is correctly detected.

Pri

nter

mai

n bo

dy s

ide

Pri

nter

mai

n bo

dy s

ide

L

L

MFlat face ofthe shaft

J

K

I

J

H

Page 47: RN Technical Manual

4 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

3. Removing the Pickup and Scraper Rollers

Removing the Scraper roller

(1) Lower the paper feed tray fully and switch off the power.

(2) Remove the Lock ring [E] on the Scraper roller shaft [C].

(3) Slide the Scraper roller [D] off the Scraper roller shaft [C].

Removing the Pickup roller

(1) Lower the paper feed tray fully and switch off the power.

(2) Remove the Lock ring [E] on the Pickup roller shaft [A].

(3) Slide the Pickup roller [B] off the Pickup roller shaft [A].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• The scraper and pickup roller contain a one-way clutch. If mounted in the opposite direction, therollers will not rotate even when the pickup roller shaft rotates. When mounted on the shaftscorrectly, the rollers spin freely in the direction shown on the diagram below when rotated manually.

A: Pickup roller shaft

B: Pickup roller

C: Scraper roller shaft

D: Scraper roller

E: Lock ring

REMOVING THE PICKUP AND SCRAPER ROLLERS

A

B

C

D

E

Page 48: RN Technical Manual

4 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE FEED TRAY DESCENT BUTTON AND UPPER LIMIT SENSOR

4. Removing the Feed Tray Descent Button and Upper Limit Sensor

(1) Remove the Master-removal lower cover. (mounting screws M4 x 8: 4 pcs)

(2) Unplug connector [A], remove the mounting screw (M4 x 8: 1 pc), and then remove the Upper limitsensor [B] together with the Upper limit sensor bracket [C].

(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs), unplug the connector [D], and then remove the Feed traydescent button [E] together with its mounting bracket [F].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Adjust the position of the upper limit sensor.

A: Upper limit sensor connector

B: Upper limit sensor

C: Upper limit sensor bracket

D: Feed tray descent button connector

E: Feed tray descent button

F: Mounting bracket

A B C D E F

Page 49: RN Technical Manual

4 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE PAPER FEED CLUTCH

5. Removing the Paper Feed Clutch

(1) Remove the rear cover.

(2) Loosen the retaining screw [C] on the Paper timing belt tension bracket [B], and reduce the tensionon the Paper feed timing belt [E].

(3) Unplug the connector [F], remove the E-ring, and remove the Paper feed clutch [D].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Align the flat face of the Pickup roller shaft [G] with that on the Paper feed clutch [D].

• Engage the slot [H] on the clutch with the clutch lock plate [I] on the machine to prevent the paperfeed clutch unit from rotating.

A: Timing gear

B: Timing belt tension bracket

C: Retaining screw

D: Paper feed clutch

E: Paper feed timing belt

F: Connector

G: Pickup roller shaft

H: Paper feed clutch slot

I: Clutch lock plate

A

B

C

DE

F

G

D

H

I

Page 50: RN Technical Manual

4 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE PICKUP ROLLER SHAFT ASS’Y

6. Removing the Pickup Roller Shaft Ass’y

(1) Remove the covers.

• Rear cover

• Master-removal lower cover

(2) Remove the pickup and scraper rollers.

(3) Remove the upper limit sensor.

(4) Remove the paper feed clutch.

(5) Remove the E-rings and bearing bushes [A] on either end of the Pickup roller shaft.

(6) Remove the mounting screw (4 x 8: 1 pc) on the shaft bracket [B], remove the bracket, and thenremove the Pickup roller shaft ass’y [C] towards you.

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Adjust the position of the upper limit sensor.

A: Bearing bush

B: Shaft bracket

C: Pickup roller shaft ass’y

A

A

B

C

Page 51: RN Technical Manual

4 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE ELEVATOR MOTOR

7. Removing the Elevator Motor

(1) Lower the paper feed tray fully, switch off the power, and pull out the print drum.

(2) Remove the covers.

• Front door

• Front cover

• Master-removal lower cover

(3) Squeeze the wire harness band [E] from the inside, detach from the side frame, and then unplug thetwo connectors [F] of the Master removal unit.

(4) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 4 pcs), and hang free the Drive PCB [A] together with itsmounting bracket.

(5) Remove the Elevator springs [G] from both sides of the Paper feed tray to prevent the tray fromspringing up.

(6) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs), unplug the connector [D] of the Elevator motor [B], andremove the Elevator motor [B].

A: Drive PCB

B: Elevator motor

C: Mounting screw

F: Connector of master removal unit

G: Elevator spring

D: Connector of elevator motor

E: Wire harness band

DC

A

B

C

E F

G

Page 52: RN Technical Manual

4 – 17RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE PAPER FEED TRAY LOWER SAFETY SWITCH

8. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Lower Safety Switch

(1) Remove the screws (Shoulder screw, M4 x 30: 2 pcs), securing the printer to the Risograph stand.

(2) Remove the rear cover.

(3) Slide out the machine from the Risograph stand (in the direction shown by the arrow in thephotograph) far enough to allow a screwdriver to be inserted in the mounting screws on the Griphandle [A]. Make sure that the rubber feet do not slip off the Risograph stand.

(4) From underneath the machine, remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs), and remove the Griphandle [A].

(5) Unplug the top connector [B].

(6) Unplug the bottom connector [C] from the stay [D].

(7) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 14: 2 pcs), and remove the Paper feed tray lower safety switch[E].

A: Grip andle

B: Top connector

C: Bottom connector

D: Stay

E: Paper feed tray lower safetyswitch

A

B

C

D

E

Page 53: RN Technical Manual

4 – 18RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

9. Removing the Stripper Unit

(1) Lower the paper feed tray fully.

(2) Place a finger on the top of the Stripper unit [A] and pull it forward to remove it.

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Set the Stripper pad ass’y [B] in the Paper guide plate [C] while it is pushed down.

• Adjust the stripper pressure and stripper angle.

REMOVING THE STRIPPER UNIT

A: Stripper unit

B: Stripper pad ass’y

C: Paper guide plate

Hold here and pull forward.

B

A

C

Page 54: RN Technical Manual

4 – 19RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE STRIPPER PAD ASS’Y

10. Removing the Stripper Pad Ass’y

(1) Lower the paper feed tray fully, and remove the stripper unit.

(2) Lift up the Stripper pad ass’y [A] by hand and remove it.

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Attach the Stripper pad [B] by pushing the face indicated by arrow against the face indicated by arrowon the Stripper pad base [C].

A: Stripper pad ass’y

B: Stripper pad

C: Stripper pad base

D: Stripper pad cover

C B

A

B

C

D

Page 55: RN Technical Manual

4 – 20RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

UPPER LIMIT SENSOR POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment

1. Upper Limit Sensor Position Adjustment

Procedure

(1) Remove the paper on the paper feed tray.

(2) Start test mode No. 453 (elevator servo) and raise the paper feed tray and bringing it to acomplete stop.

(3) Once it is stopped, check that the gap between the Pickup roller [C] and the Paper feed tray [E] is1.0 mm ±0.3 mm.

(4) If the gap is not within the specifications, detach the master removal box and remove the Master-removal lower cover.

(5) Loosen the mounting screw [B] on the Upper limit sensor bracket [A], and adjust by sliding theupper limit sensor up or down.

Symptoms

If the upper limit sensor is positioned too high, the paper-feed pressure is increased and multiple sheetfeeding is more likely to arise.

Conversely, if it is positioned too low, the paper-feed pressure is reduced and non-feeding is more likelyto arise.

A: Upper limit sensor bracket

B: Upper limit sensor bracket mounting screw

C: Pickup roller

D: Scraper roller

E: Paper feed tray

A

B

E

1.0

±0.

3

C D

Page 56: RN Technical Manual

4 – 21RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

STRIPPER UNIT ADJUSTMENT

2. Stripper Unit Adjustment

Procedure

(1) Slide the Paper feed pressure adjust lever to suit the paper type before printing.

(2) If multiple feeding or non-feeding occurs, adjust the stripper-pad angle and pressure.

1) Multiple feeding

• Turn the Stripper pad angle adjust knob [A] clockwise to increase the stripper-pad angle (raise thepad more vertically).

• Turn the Stripper pressure adjust knob [B] clockwise to increase the stripper pressure.

2) Non-feeding

• Turn the Stripper pad angle adjust knob [A] counter-clockwise to reduce the stripper-pad angle(lower the pad more horizontally).

• Turn the Stripper pressure adjust knob [B] counter-clockwise to reduce the stripper pressure.

A: Stripper pad angle adjust knob

B: Stripper pressure adjust knob

Normal (24 degrees)

Adjustablefrom 14degrees to28 degrees

Reduced angle Increased angle

Stronger

Normal Weaker

Strong Weak

A

B

Page 57: RN Technical Manual

4 – 22RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 4. FIRST PAPER FEED SECTION

3. Paper-Feed Clutch “ON” Timing Adjustment

Check and adjustment procedure

(1) Test print to check that paper is fed smoothly.

(2) If the first stage paper feed timing is not synchronized, adjust using test mode No. 481 (paper-feed-clutch activation drum angle adjustment). (For the setting procedure, refer to Chapter 16:Test Modes.)

(3) Repeat from step (1) until correct timing is achieved.

Symptoms

If the first stage paper feed timing is not synchronized, paper jamming or inconsistent print registrationmay occur.

4. Paper-Feed Clutch “OFF” Timing Adjustment

Check and adjustment procedure

(1) Test print to check that printing is performed smoothly.

(2) If the paper is excessively or insufficiently buckled and printing is not performed smoothly, run testmodes No. 482–485 (paper-feed-clutch deactivation drum angle adjustment) according to theuser’s paper selection setting. (For the setting procedure, refer to Chapter 16: Test Modes.)

(3) Repeat from step (1) until correct timing is achieved.

Symptoms

If the paper is excessively or insufficiently buckled, paper may not be fed to the second stage and paperjamming may occur.

PAPER-FEED CLUTCH “ON” TIMING ADJUSTMENT

Page 58: RN Technical Manual

5 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5: SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................5-2

1. Second Paper Feed Mechanism ..............................................................................5-2

2. Vertical Print Positioning Mechanism .......................................................................5-4

Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................5-6

1. Removing the Guide Roller Ass’y ............................................................................5-6

2. Removing the Paper Guide Plate Ass’y ...................................................................5-7

3. Removing the Paper Sensor ....................................................................................5-9

4. Removing the Timing Roller .................................................................................. 5-10

5. Removing the Print-Positioning Unit ..................................................................... 5-12

6. Removing the Vertical Centering Sensor .............................................................. 5-13

7. Removing the Print-Positioning Pulse Motor ........................................................ 5-14

8. Removing the Timing Gear ................................................................................... 5-15

Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 5-16

1. Timing Cam Mounting Position ............................................................................. 5-16

Page 59: RN Technical Manual

5 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

SECOND PAPER FEED MECHANISM

Mechanism

1. Second Paper Feed Mechanism

When the main motor operates during printing, the Main cam [A] rotates clockwise.

The Main cam [A] rotation moves the Timing gear [C] via the Cam follower arm [B], and this rotates theTiming cam [D].

The Timing cam [D] contains a one-way clutch, so that when it rotates counter-clockwise, the rotation istransferred to the Timing roller [G], but when it rotates clockwise, the rotation is not transferred.

The Load spring [H] continuously applies a load to the Timing roller [G] to ensure that the Timing roller [G]stops immediately when it is not rotated.

The Timing roller [G] rotation also rotates the Guide roller [F] clockwise.

As the Timing cam [D] rotates, the protrusion pushes against the Timing lever [E] and raises the Guideroller [F].

During printing, the Guide roller [F] moves down and contacts the Timing roller [G] during the first paperfeed operation, and then rises once the Timing roller [G] stops rotating.

A: Main cam

B: Cam follower arm

C: Timing gear

D: Timing cam

E: Timing lever

F: Guide roller

G: Timing roller

H: Load spring

A

D

E

F H

CB G

Page 60: RN Technical Manual

5 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

SECOND PAPER FEED MECHANISM

Drum Position-A

At Drum position-A, the protrusionon the Timing cam [B] pushesagainst the Timing lever [C] toraise the Guide roller [D].

First paper feed start

When the first paper feed startsand the paper is fed in, the Timinggear [E] is rotated in the direction,indicated by arrow mark, by theMain cam [A]. This rotates theTiming cam [B], which lowers theTiming lever [C] to lower theGuide roller [D].

Second paper feed start

When the first paper feed ends,the Timing gear [E] is rotated bythe Main cam [A] in the directionindicated by the arrow mark. Thisrotates the Timing cam [B] andalso causes the timing roller [D]to rotate, feeding the paper. (TheGuide roller [D] rotates on contactwith the Timing roller [F].)

A: Main cam

B: Timing cam

C: Timing lever

D: Guide roller

E: Timing gear

F: Timing roller

A

B

C

D

F

E

Page 61: RN Technical Manual

5 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

VERTICAL PRINT POSITIONING MECHANISM

2. Vertical Print Positioning Mechanism

Pressing the < > or < > print position keys on the panel activates the Print positioning pulse motor [A],which rotates the Print positioning adjuster cam [B] to move the Print positioning plate ass’y [C].

The Print positioning plate ass’y [C] motion moves the Print positioning lever ass’y [E], changing thetiming with the main cam.

The second paper feed (timing roller rotation start) timing is thus changed, changing the vertical printingposition.

The Vertical centering sensor [D] checks the centering of the print positioning.

A: Print-positioning pulse motor

B: Print-positioning cam (with the spiral groove on its back side)

C: Print-positioning plate ass’y

D: Vertical centering sensor

E: Print-positioning lever ass’y

ABC

D

Page 62: RN Technical Manual

5 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

VERTICAL PRINT POSITIONING MECHANISM

A: Main cam

B: Print-positioning plate ass’y

C: Print-positioning cam

D: Print-positioning lever ass’y

E: Bearing

When the < > key is pressed, the print-positioning adjuster cam [C] and print-positioning adjuster plate ass’y [B] move in thedirections indicated by arrows.

The movement of the Print-positioning plateass’y [B] also moves the Print-positioning leverass’y [D], and the bearing [E] in contact with theMain cam [A] moves in the direction indicatedby arrows.

The timing of the contact of the bearing [E]against the Main cam [A] is delayed, causingthe second paper feed timing to delay, andmoves the print position up.

When the < > key is pressed, the Print-positioning cam [C] and Print-positioning plateass’y [B] move in the directions indicated byarrows.

The movement of the Print-positioning plateass’y [B] also moves the Print-positioning leverass’y [D], and the bearing [E] in contact with theMain cam [A] moves in the direction indicatedby arrows.

The timing of the contact of the bearing [E]against the Main cam [A] is advanced, causingthe second paper feed timing to advance, andmoves the print position down.

2) Pressing the < > (down) key on the panel

1) Pressing the < > (up) key on the panel

A

B

CE

D

A

D

A

B

C

A

E

Page 63: RN Technical Manual

5 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y

Removal and Assembly

1. Removing the Guide Roller Ass’y

(1) Pull out the print drum and remove the following covers.

• Front door

• Front cover

• Rear cover

(2) Unplug the three connectors and remove the controller. (mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs)

(3) Remove the Guide roller spring [A].

(4) Remove the Timing lever ass’y [B]. (mounting screws M4 x 8: 1 pc)

(5) Remove the E-rings [C] and bearing bushes [D] at both front and rear, and then remove the Guideroller ass’y [E].

A: Guide roller spring

B: Timing lever ass’y

C: E-ring

D: Bearing bush

E: Guide roller ass’y

A

B

C

D

E

Page 64: RN Technical Manual

5 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE PAPER GUIDE PLATE ASS’Y

2. Removing the Paper Guide Plate Ass’y

(1) Pull out the print drum and remove the following covers.

• Front door

• Front cover

• Rear cover

• Master-removal lower cover

(2) Remove the following components.

• Paper feed tray unit

• Stripper unit

• Paper feed clutch

• Pickup roller shaft ass’y

• Elevator motor

• Guide roller ass’y

(3) Unplug the connectors from the Main PCB and remove the Main PCB together with its mountingbracket. (mounting screws M3 x 6: 5 pcs)

(4) Loosen the retaining screws, and remove Guard plate F [A] and Guard plate R [B].

(5) Remove Elevator rack front [C] and Elevator rack rear [D]. (mounting screws M4 x 8: 4 pcs each)

A: Guard plate F

B: Guard plate R

C: Elevator rack front

D: Elevator rack rear

DC

B A

Page 65: RN Technical Manual

5 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE PAPER GUIDE PLATE ASS’Y

(6) Unplug the connector from the Paper guide plate [A], remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 7 pcs),and then remove the Paper guide plate [A].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Hook the Paper guide plate [A] onto the timing roller bearing bushes [B]. (See enlarged view.)

• Align the half-pierced sections of the front and rear elevator racks.

• Align the gear height for the front and rear elevator racks.

A: Paper guide plate

B: Bearing bush

Enlarged view

B A

A

• Raise the front and rearelevator racks fully todisengage the gears,and then lower themwhile aligning theheight.

Page 66: RN Technical Manual

5 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE PAPER SENSOR

3. Removing the Paper Sensor

(1) Pull out the print drum and remove the following covers.

• Front door

• Front cover

• Rear cover

• Master-removal lower cover

(2) Remove the following components.

• Paper feed tray unit

• Stripper unit

• Paper feed clutch

• Pickup roller shaft ass’y

• Elevator motor

• Guide roller ass’y

• Paper guide plate

(3) Unplug the Paper sensor connector [A] from the Paper guide plate [F].

(4) Remove the Paper sensor (send) [B] mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc) and Paper sensor (receive) [C]mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc), remove the Paper-sensor covers [D] and [E], and then remove Papersensors [B] and [C] from the Paper guide plate [F].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Hook the Paper sensors onto the retaining brackets of the Paper guide plate.

A: Connector

B: Paper sensor (send)

C: Paper sensor (receive)

D: Paper-sensor cover (send)

E: Paper-sensor cover (receive)

F: Paper guide plate

A E C

D

B

F

Page 67: RN Technical Manual

5 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE TIMING ROLLER

4. Removing the Timing Roller

(1) Remove the following covers.

• Front door

• Front cover

• Rear cover

• Master-removal lower cover

(2) Remove the following components.

• Paper feed tray unit

• Stripper unit

• Paper feed clutch

• Pickup roller shaft ass’y

• Elevator motor

• Guide roller ass’y

• Paper guide plate

(3) Remove the E-ring from the rear of the Timing roller [A], then remove the Timing cam [B].

(4) Remove the E-ring and collar [C] from the front of the Timing roller [A], then remove the Load spring[D].

(5) Remove the E-rings and bearing bushes [E] from both ends of the Timing roller [A], and then removethe Timing roller [A].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Note the direction in which the load spring is mounted. (See diagram.)

[Adjustment after Reassembly]

• Adjust the timing cam mounting position.

AB

Page 68: RN Technical Manual

5 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

A: Timing roller

B: Timing cam

C: Collar

D: Load spring

E: Bearing bush

REMOVING THE TIMING ROLLER

A

D

C

E

Load spring mounting direction

Page 69: RN Technical Manual

5 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

5. Removing the Print-Positioning Unit

(1) Remove the rear cover.

(2) Remove the controller.

(3) Remove the Timing gear spring [A].

(4) Unplug the connectors on the Vertical centering sensor [B] and Print-positioning pulse motor [C].

(5) Remove the E-ring on the Cam follower arm [D], and remove the Cam follower arm [D] and Washers[F] (one each on the front and rear of the Cam follower arm [D]) from the Timing gear [E].

(6) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 8 pcs) on the Print-positioning unit [G], and then remove thePrint-positioning unit [G].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• When mounting the print-positioning unit [G], the Timing gear [E] should be turned all the way in theclockwise direction.

[Adjustment after Reassembly]

• Adjust the timing cam mounting position.

REMOVING THE PRINT-POSITIONING UNIT

A: Timing gear spring

B: Vertical centering sensor

C: Print-positioning pulse motor

D: Cam follower arm

E: Timing gear

F: Washer

G: Print-positioning unit

B

D E

A

F

C

G

Page 70: RN Technical Manual

5 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE VERTICAL CENTERING SENSOR

6. Removing the Vertical Centering Sensor

(1) Remove the rear cover.

(2) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screw (3 x 6: 1 pc), and then remove the Verticalcentering sensor [B] together with the Vertical centering sensor bracket [C].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Align the two faces of the Vertical centering sensor bracket [C] as shown in the photograph below.

A: Print-positioning base unit

B: Vertical centering sensor

C: Vertical centering sensor bracket

Align faces.

A

B

C

Page 71: RN Technical Manual

5 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

7. Removing the Print-Positioning Pulse Motor

(1) Remove the rear cover.

(2) Remove the following components.

• Controller

• Timing gear spring

• Print-positioning unit [A]

(3) Remove the E-ring and remove the Print-positioning cam [B].

(4) Remove the E-ring and remove the Print-positioning intermediate gear [C].

(5) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 6: 2 pcs) on the Print-positioning pulse motor [D], and thenremove the Print-positioning pulse motor [D].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Insert the Print-positioning plate shaft [F] into the spiral groove [G] on the Print-positioning cam [B].

REMOVING THE PRINT-POSITIONING PULSE MOTOR

A: Print-positioning unit

B: Print-positioning cam

C: Print-positioning intermediate gear

D: Print-positioning pulse motor

E: Print-positioning plate ass’y

F: Print-positioning plate ass’y pin

G: Spiral groove on the Print-positioning cam

A

B

C

D

E

D

F

G

Page 72: RN Technical Manual

5 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

REMOVING THE TIMING GEAR

8. Removing the Timing Gear

(1) Remove the rear cover.

(2) Remove the following components.

• Controller

• Guide roller spring

• Timing cam [A]

• Timing gear spring [B]

• Print-positioning unit [C]

(3) Remove the E-ring from the Timing gear shaft [E] and remove the Timing gear [D].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Adjust the mounting position of the timing cam.

A: Timing cam

B: Timing gear spring

C: Print-positioning unit

D: Timing gear

E: Timing gear shaft

A

B

C

D

D

E

Page 73: RN Technical Manual

5 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 5. SECOND PAPER FEED SECTION

Adjustment

1. Timing Cam Mounting Position

Procedure(1) Move the print drum to position A, centralize the printing position, switch off the power, and then

remove the rear cover.

(2) With the positioning marks aligned on the Main cam and print-positioning unit, check that thepositioning marks [C] are aligned on the Timing gear [B] and Timing cam [A]. (See photograph 1.)

* The alignment may be offset in the direction shown in photograph 2, but not in the directionshown in photograph 3.

(3) If not aligned, remove the E-ring from the timing roller shaft and remove the timing cam [A].

(4) Mount the Timing cam [A] and Timing gear [B] with the positioning marks [C] aligned.

Symptoms

• If the timing cam is incorrectly positioned, the timing of the guide roller’s vertical movement will beoff, and paper jamming, print registration problems, or ghosting may occur.

TIMING CAM MOUNTING POSITION

A: Timing cam

B: Timing gear

C: Positioning marks

Photograph 1

Photograph 3Photograph 2

A B

C

YES NO

Page 74: RN Technical Manual

6 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6: PRESS SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................6-2

1. Press Mechanism ....................................................................................................6-2

2. Pressure Control Mechanism ..................................................................................6-4

Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................6-5

1. Removing the Pressure Roller .................................................................................6-5

2. Removing the Pressure Solenoid ............................................................................6-6

3. Removing the Pressure Lever Ass’y ........................................................................6-7

4. Removing the Pressure Control Motor and Print Pressure Control Sensor ...........6-8

Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 6-10

1. Mounting Position of the Pressure Lever Ass’y .................................................... 6-10

Page 75: RN Technical Manual

6 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

PRESS MECHANISM

Mechanism

1. Press Mechanism

The main motor activates when printing begins, and the Pressure solenoid [F] activates once the printdrum rotates through 40°.

As the clamp plate base on the print drum approaches the pressure roller, the protrusion on the Pressurecam [A] pushes against Pressure lever A [B] to rotate it clockwise. This rotary motion causes Pressurelever A [B] to push against Pressure lever B [C], and the Solenoid lever [G] separates from Pressure leverB [C] and descends.

Once the protrusion on the Pressure cam [A] has passed, pressure lever A [B] rotates counter-clockwise.Likewise, Pressure lever B [C] is pulled by the tension of the Pressure spring [D] and Second pressurespring [E], and rotates in unison with Pressure lever A [B]. The Pressure shaft [H] fixed to Pressure leverB [C] therefore also rotates counter-clockwise. The pressure roller therefore rises and is pressed againstthe print drum.

During printing, the Pressure cam [A] pushes against Pressure lever A [B] and lowers the pressure rollerto prevent the pressure roller from touching the print drum clamp plate base. The Pressure solenoid [F]remains activated.

After printing is complete, the Pressure solenoid [F] is deactivated when the print drum reaches the 135°position.

A

B

CDE

F G H

Page 76: RN Technical Manual

6 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

PRESS MECHANISM

A: Pressure cam

B: Pressure lever A

C: Pressure lever B

D: Pressure spring

E: Second pressure spring

F: Pressure solenoid

G: Solenoid lever

H: Pressure shaft

Pressure roller is raised

ABC

G

Pressure roller is lowered

ABC

H

Page 77: RN Technical Manual

6 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

PRESSURE CONTROL MECHANISM

2. Pressure Control Mechanism

Pressing the < > or < > print density keys on the panel activates the Pressure control motor [A] andmoves the Print pressure gear ass’y [D]. The movement of the Print pressure gear ass’y [D] varies thetension of the second pressure spring [B].

This alters the pressure acting on Pressure lever B [C], and varies the print density by varying thepressure of the pressure roller against the print drum. The pressure control motor is not actuallyactivated until the START key is pressed.

The printing pressure will vary depending on the printing speed and print density settings, the ink color,the length of time the print drum remains standing, and the print drum’s internal temperature.

The Print pressure control sensor [E] checks the standard printing pressure position.

A: Pressure control motor

B: Second pressure spring

C: Pressure lever B

D: Print pressure gear ass’y

E: Print pressure control sensor

A B C

E D

Page 78: RN Technical Manual

6 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

REMOVING THE PRESSURE ROLLER

Removal and Assembly

1. Removing the Pressure Roller

(1) Pull out the print drum.

(2) Insert a screwdriver through the opening in the front frame of the machine, and remove the retainingscrew [B].

(3) Slide the Pressure roller [A] forward until the bearing [C] disengages from the Pressure roller bracket[D], and then lift upward to remove it.

A: Pressure roller

B: Retaining screw

C: Bearing

D: Pressure roller bracket

C A

B D

Page 79: RN Technical Manual

6 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

REMOVING THE PRESSURE SOLENOID

2. Removing the Pressure Solenoid

(1) Remove the rear cover.

(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4x8: 3 pcs), and pull the Filter PCB unit [A] forward.

(3) Remove the Second pressure spring [B] and Pressure spring [C].

(4) Unplug the connector [D], remove the mounting screws (M4x8: 4 pcs) on the Solenoid base ass’y [E],and then remove the Solenoid base ass’y [E].

(5) Unplug the Pressure solenoid connector [G], remove the mounting screws (M3x6: 2 pcs), and thenremove the Pressure solenoid [F].

[Work Precautions]

• The Pressure spring and Second pressure spring are extremely powerful. Take care to avoid injurywhen removing or refitting.

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Align the half-pierce.

A: Filter PCB unit

B: Second pressure spring

C: Pressure spring

D: Connector

E: Solenoid base ass’y

F: Pressure solenoid

G: Pressure solenoid connector

A E

F

D

B

C

G E

Page 80: RN Technical Manual

6 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

REMOVING THE PRESSURE LEVER ASS’Y

3. Removing the Pressure Lever Ass’y

(1) Make a confidential master, and then bring the print drum to position A.

(2) Open the scanner table, and remove the rear cover.

(3) Remove the screws and pull forward the filter PCB unit.

(4) Remove both the Second pressure spring and Pressure spring.

(5) Loosen the two set screws [D] on Pressure lever B [A] using an Allen wrench (3 mm), and remove thePressure lever ass’y (Pressure lever A [B] + Pressure lever B [A]) from the Pressure shaft [C].

[Work Precautions]

• The Pressure spring and Second pressure spring are extremely powerful. Take care to avoid injurywhen removing or refitting.

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Adjust the mounting position of the Pressure lever ass’y.

A: Pressure lever B

B: Pressure lever A

C: Pressure shaft

D: Set screw

Enlarged view

A

C

B

D

D

Enlarged view

Page 81: RN Technical Manual

6 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

REMOVING THE PRESSURE CONTROL MOTOR AND PRINT PRESSURE CONTROLSENSOR

4. Removing the Pressure Control Motor and Print Pressure Con-trol Sensor

Removing the Pressure Control Motor

(1) Remove the rear cover.

(2) Remove the E-ring and the Drive transfer gear [C].

(3) Unplug the connector [B] on the Pressure control motor [A], remove the mounting screws (M3x6: 2pcs), and then remove the Pressure control motor [A].

Removing the Print Pressure Control Sensor

(1) Remove the rear cover.

(2) Remove the mounting screws on the filter PCB unit, and then pull it forward.

(3) Unplug the connector [E] on the Print pressure control sensor [D], remove the mounting screw(M3 x 6: 1 pc), and then remove the Print pressure control sensor [D] together with the Printpressure control sensor bracket [F].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Align the half-pierce.

A: Pressure control motor

B: Pressure control motor connector

C: Drive transfer gear

D: Print pressure control sensor

E: Print pressure control sensor connector

F: Print pressure control sensor bracket

B

A

C

D

F

E

Page 82: RN Technical Manual

6 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

[Memo]

Page 83: RN Technical Manual

6 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

MOUNTING POSITION OF THE PRESSURE LEVER ASS’Y

Adjustment

1. Mounting Position of the Pressure Lever Ass’y

Checking and adjustment procedure(1) Make a confidential master, and then bring the print drum to position A.

(2) Remove the rear cover.

(3) Remove the screws and pull forward the filter PCB unit.

(4) Remove the Second pressure spring, push up the Pressure lever B [A], and disengage it from theSolenoid lever [D].

(5) Attach the Second pressure spring and check that the gap between Pressure lever A [B] andPressure lever B [A] is between 1.5 mm and 2.0 mm. (See detailed figure 2.)

(6) If the gap in step (5) is outside the specifications, remove the Second pressure spring andloosen the two set screws on Pressure lever B [A]. Insert a 3 mm Allen wrench [C] betweenPressure lever A [B] and Pressure lever B [A] (see detailed figure 1), rotate the Pressure shaft [E]fully counter-clockwise, and then tighten the set screws on Pressure lever B [A] with the pressureroller pressing hard against the print drum. The Pressure lever B [A] should be pushed all theway back against the machine, when tightening the set screws.

(7) Check as in step (5), and if the gap is still outside the specifications, repeat step (6). If the gap iswithin the specifications, push Pressure lever B [A] upwards, lock with the Solenoid lever [D], andattach the Second pressure spring.

Symptoms

• If the gap is too small, the pressure will be too weak, and the printing density may become too light.

• If the gap is too large, there will not be sufficient space between the Pressure roller and the Clampplate base on the print drum, and they may touch, damaging the Clamp plate base.

A

B C D

E

Page 84: RN Technical Manual

6 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

MOUNTING POSITION OF THE PRESSURE LEVER ASS’Y

A: Pressure lever B

B: Pressure lever A

C: Allen wrench (3 mm)

D: Solenoid lever

E: Pressure shaft

A

B

C

Detailed figure 1

A

B

1.5–

2.0

mm

Detailed figure 2

Page 85: RN Technical Manual

6 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 6. PRESS SECTION

[Memo]

Page 86: RN Technical Manual

7 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7: PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................7-2

1. Paper Ejection Mechanism ......................................................................................7-2

2. Paper Separator Mechanism ...................................................................................7-3

3. Paper Ejection Wing Mechanism .............................................................................7-4

Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................7-5

1. Removing the Paper Receiving Tray ........................................................................7-5

2. Removing the De-electricity Plate and Suction Unit .................................................7-6

3. Removing the Suction Fan .......................................................................................7-8

4. Removing the Paper Ejection Wing .........................................................................7-9

5. Removing the Paper Ejection Motor and Encoder Sensor .................................... 7-11

6. Removing the Transfer Belts ................................................................................. 7-12

7. Removing the Separation Fan Unit ....................................................................... 7-13

8. Removing the Separator Fan and Paper Receiving Sensor ................................ 7-14

9. Removing the Separator ........................................................................................ 7-15

Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 7-16

1. Separator Mounting Position ................................................................................. 7-16

Page 87: RN Technical Manual

7 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

PAPER EJECTION MECHANISM

Mechanism

1. Paper Ejection Mechanism

Printed paper is first detached from the print drum by the Separator [B] and two Separation fans [F]. It isthen sent to the paper receiving tray by the Transfer belts [E].

The transfer belts [E] are driven by the Paper ejection motor [C].

Two Suction fans [D] are located below the Transfer belts [E], and these suck the paper onto the transferbelts [E].

The Paper receiving sensor [A] checks whether the paper is ejected correctly.

The Encoder sensor [G] checks the rotation of the Encoder sensor disc [H] to ensure that the transfer beltspeed is slightly faster than the corresponding print drum rotation speed and ensure smooth paperejection from the print drum.

A: Paper receiving sensor

B: Separator

C: Paper ejection motor

D: Suction fan

E: Transfer belt

F: Separation fans (x2)

G: Encoder sensor

H: Encoder sensor disc

A

B

F

D

E

C

G H C

Paper transfer direction

Page 88: RN Technical Manual

7 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

PAPER SEPARATOR MECHANISM

2. Paper Separator Mechanism

The Separator [A] is close to the print drum when the paper is being detached from the print drum. As theprint drum rotates and the clamp plate base approaches the Separator [A], the Separator arm ass’y [G] ispushed by the Pressure cam [F] on the Print drum pulley. This also pushes the Separator lever [H], andthe Separation shaft [B] rotates, causing the Separator [A] to move away from the print drum.

Likewise, when pulling out the print drum, the Release lever [D] is returned by the Release lever spring[E]. And when the Release arm [C] is pressed, the Separation shaft [B] rotates, causing the Separator [A]to move away from the print drum.

A: Separator

B: Separation shaft

C: Release arm

D: Release lever

E: Release lever spring

F: Pressure cam

G: Separator arm assembly

H: Separator lever

Rear (drive unit side)

E

D

CA B

Descends

PushesReturns

Front (panel side)

F

GG

HH

Separatordescends

Separator rises

Page 89: RN Technical Manual

7 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

PAPER EJECTION WING MECHANISM

3. Paper Ejection Wing Mechanism

The left- and right-hand ejection wings on the Suction unit can be set manually to the raised [B] or lowered[C] positions to suit the paper ejection requirements. Normally, the ejection wings are raised [B] forregular paper and lowered [C] for cards.

The ejection wings are raised and lowered by moving the Wing position knob [D] located below the left-hand Ejection wing [A] up or down.

The Wing position knob [D] has a protruding tab [E] inside, which engages with the catch [F] on the left-hand Ejection wing [A]. Moving the Wing position knob [D] up and down therefore moves the Ejectionwings up and down.

A: Paper ejection wing (left)

B: Ejection wing position when raised

C: Ejection wing position when lowered

D: Wing position knob

E: Tab or rear of knob

F: Knob catch

A C

D

B

FE

Page 90: RN Technical Manual

7 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

REMOVING THE PAPER RECEIVING TRAY

Removal and Assembly

1. Removing the Paper Receiving Tray

(1) Fold down the fences of the Paper receiving tray [A], and close the Paper receiving tray [A] to an angleof about 45°.

(2) Lifting the paper receiving tray [A] vertically upwards at this angle detaches it from the machine.

A: Paper receiving tray

A

Page 91: RN Technical Manual

7 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

REMOVING THE DE-ELECTRICITY PLATE AND SUCTION UNIT

2. Removing the De-electricity Plate and Suction Unit

Removing the De-electricity Plate

(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following components.

• Paper receiving tray

(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 4 pcs) [B] on the De-electricity Plate [A], and then removethe De-electricity Plate [A].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Align the half-pierce [C] when mounting the De-electricity Plate [A].

A: De-electricity Plate

B: Mounting screws (M4 x 8: 4 pcs)

C: Half-pierce

Removing the Suction Unit

(3) Unplug the suction unit connector [D].

(4) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs) [E] on the Suction unit [F], and then remove theSuction unit [F] in the same direction that paper is ejected.

D: Suction unit connector

E: Mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2pcs)

F: Suction unit

[Continued on next page]

B

A

C

D E

F

Page 92: RN Technical Manual

7 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

REMOVING THE DE-ELECTRICITY PLATE AND SUCTION UNIT

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Mount the suction unit by hooking the left- and right-hand side front edges [G] onto the brackets [H]on the machine side frames.

G: Suction unit front edge

H: Brackets

G

(Enlarged view)

H H

Page 93: RN Technical Manual

7 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

REMOVING THE SUCTION FAN

3. Removing the Suction Fan

(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following components.

• Paper receiving tray

• De-electricity Plate

• Suction unit

(2) Turn the Suction unit [A] upside down, and unplug the suction fan connector [B].

(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 10: 3 pcs) [C], and remove the Suction fan [D].

A: Suction unit

B: Connector

C: Mounting screws (M4 x 10: 3 pcs)

D: Suction fan

C B

C

A

D

Page 94: RN Technical Manual

7 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

REMOVING THE PAPER EJECTION WING

4. Removing the Paper Ejection Wing

(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following components.

• Paper receiving tray

• De-electricity Plate

• Suction unit

(2) Lift up the belt driven pulley ass’y [A] with your fingers, unhook from the suction unit, and remove.

A: Belt driven pulley ass’y

(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 6 pcs) [C] on the Suction face cover [B].

(4) Remove the Suction face cover from the Suction unit while threading it beneath the two transfer belts[D].

D: Transfer belts

B: Suction face cover

C: Mounting screws (M4 x 8: 6 pcs)

[Continued on next page]

A A

CC

C

B

D

Page 95: RN Technical Manual

7 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

REMOVING THE TIMING ROLLER

(5) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 8: 2 pcs) [F] from both the left- and right-hand Ejection wings [E],and remove the ejection wings.

E: Ejection wings (left, right)

F: Mounting screws (M3 x 8: 2 pcs each)

[Precaution on Reassembly]

• Securely engage the spring [G] beneath the left-hand ejection wing.

• When mounting the ejection wings onto the shaft, mount them on the flat cut surface [H] of the shaft.

G: Spring

H: Flat cut surface

• Locate the Face cover [I] securely onto the half-pierce [J] before screwing on.

I: Face cover

J: Half-pierce J I

G

D

H

E FFE

Page 96: RN Technical Manual

7 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

REMOVING THE PAPER EJECTION MOTOR AND ENCODER SENSOR

5. Removing the Paper Ejection Motor and Encoder Sensor

Removing the Paper Ejection Motor

(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following components.

• Paper receiving tray

• De-electricity Plate

• Suction unit

• Ejection wings

(2) Unplug the paper ejection motor connector [B].

(3) Remove the Paper ejection motor belt [D], remove the paper ejection motor mounting screws (M3x 5: 3 pcs) [C], and then remove the Paper ejection motor [A].

A: Paper ejection motor

B: Paper ejection motor connector

C: Mounting screws (M3 x 5: 3 pcs)

D: Paper ejection

Removing the Encoder Sensor

(4) Unplug the encoder sensor connector [F], remove the sensor hooks [G] from the mountingbracket, and then remove the encoder sensor [E].

E: Encoder sensor

F: Connector

G: Sensor hooks

E

F

G

BA C D

Page 97: RN Technical Manual

7 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

REMOVING THE TRANSFER BELTS

6. Removing the Transfer Belts

(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following components.

• Paper receiving tray

• De-electricity Plate

• Suction unit

• Ejection wings

(2) Remove the Paper ejection motor belt [A].

(3) Remove the E-rings [B] on the left and right of the Belt pulley shaft [C], and remove the Transfer belts[D] by sliding them off the Belt pulley shaft [C].

A: Paper ejection motor belt

B: Left and right belt pulleyshaft E-rings

C: Belt pulley shaft

D: Transfer belt

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Fit the left and right bearings [G] and E-rings [E] on the belt pulley shaft from outside the mountingbrackets.

• Mount the pulley [F] on the left-hand end of the Belt pulley shaft [H] with the flange facing inwards.

E: E-ring

F: Pulley

G: Bearing

H: Belt pulley shaft

A

B BDC

E F G H H G E

Page 98: RN Technical Manual

7 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

REMOVING THE SEPARATION FAN UNIT

7. Removing the Separation Fan Unit

(1) Switch off the power and remove the rear cover.

(2) Unplug the separation fan unit connector [A].

(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs) [B] on the Separation fan unit [C], and remove theseparation fan unit by sliding it in the same direction that paper is ejected.

A: Separation fan unit connector

B: Mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)

C: Separation fan unit

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Engage the hooks [D] on the Separation fan unit into the slots [E] inside the machine.

D: Hooks on the Separation fan unit

E: Slots inside the machine

BA

C

D D

E E D

Page 99: RN Technical Manual

7 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

REMOVING THE SEPARATOR FAN AND PAPER RECEIVING SENSOR

8. Removing the Separator Fan and Paper Receiving Sensor

Removing the Separator Fan

(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and remove the following component.

• Separation fan unit

(2) Remove the nozzle mounting screw (tapping screw M3 x 10: 3 pcs) [A], and remove the Nozzle [E].

(3) Unplug the two separation fan connectors [D].

(4) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 12: 3 pcs each) [B] from the two Separation fans [C], andremove both Separation fans [C].

A: Nozzle mounting screw (tapping screws M3 x 10: 3 pcs)

B: Separation fan mounting screws (M3 x 12: 3 pcs each)

C: Separation fan

D: Separation fan connectors

E: Nozzle

Removing the Paper Receiving Sensor

(5) Disengage the Paper receiving sensor [F] from the hook [G] and remove the Paper receivingsensor [F].

(6) Unplug the Paper receiving sensor connector [H].

F: Paper ejection sensor

G: Hook

H: Connector

F HG

A

D

B

C

D

BBB

AAB

C

E

Page 100: RN Technical Manual

7 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

REMOVING THE SEPARATOR

9. Removing the Separator

(1) Pull out the print drum, switch off the power, and remove the front cover.

(2) Remove the separator mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc) [A].

(3) Remove the release arm mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc) [B].

(4) Remove the E-ring [C] on the end of the separation shaft, and remove the bearing bush.

D: Separation shaft rear bearing bush

E: Separation shaft

F: Separator

G: Release arm

(5) Push the Separation shaft [E] back slightly, and remove the rear bearing bush from the machine sideframe. Do not push back the shaft more than necessary. To prevent the components mounted onthe rear from detaching, stop pushing back the shaft once the bush in the rear has been removed.

(6) Slide the Separator [F] and Release arm [G] forward and remove both of these parts off the machine.

[Reference]

Photograph of separator assembly and rear mount(machine drive side)

A: Separator mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc)

B: Release arm mounting screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc)

C: Separation shaft end E-ring

D E F G

CA B

Page 101: RN Technical Manual

7 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 7. PAPER EJECTION SYSTEM

SEPARATOR MOUNTING POSITION

Adjustment

1. Separator Mounting Position

(1) Using test chart No.15, create a master and make prints. Check that the paper does not jam on thedrum and that there is no black line through the center of the paper caused by the Separator touchingthe print drum. The Separator position is OK if there is no paper jamming on the print drum with 5mm white margin on the top of the prints.

(2) If the paper sticks to the print drum or black line appears on the printed sheet, stop the print drum atposition-A, switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and then remove the following component.

• Separation fan unit

(3) Insert a screwdriver through the insertion point [B] at the bottom left of Pressure lever A [A], andloosen the retaining screw [D] on the Separator positioning plate[C].

(4) Insert a penlight inside the machine, on top of the suction unit, and inspect the tip of the Separator [E]through the square opening in the machine side frame located just above Pressure lever A [A].

(5) Move the Separator positioning plate [C] and tighten the separator positioning plate retaining screw[D] so that the gap between the Separator [E] tip and the Print drum surface [F] is 1.0 mm to 1.5 mm.

Symptoms

• If the tip of the Separator [E] touches the Print drum surface [F], it will scratch the surface of themaster, causing a black line on the printed sheets.

• Conversely, if the gap is too wide, the paper will not be properly released from the print drum, andsticks onto the print drum.

A: Pressure lever A

B: Screwdriver insertion point

C: Separator positioning plate

D: Separator positioning plate retaining screw

E: Separator

F: Print drum surface

G: Separator positioning plate base

D

C

F

E

G

1.0–1.5 mm

A B C D

Page 102: RN Technical Manual

8 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8: PRINT DRUM SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................8-2

1. Master on Drum (in Printing) Check Mechanism .....................................................8-2

2. Print Drum Set Mechanism ......................................................................................8-3

3. Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB ...................................................................................8-4

4. Squeegee Roller Rotation Mechanism ....................................................................8-5

5. Inking Mechanism ....................................................................................................8-6

Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................8-7

1. Removing the Print Drum Front Cover, Ink Cartridge Guide Ass’y,Drum Front Upper Cover ..........................................................................................8-7

2. Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch Cover and Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB ..8-9

3. Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB Mounting Bracket ........................... 8-10

4. Removing the Swing Base Ass’y ........................................................................... 8-11

5. Removing the Ink Cartridge Guide Bottom Ass’y .................................................. 8-12

6. Removing the Ink Pump Unit and Inking Motor ..................................................... 8-13

7. Removing the Print Drum Set Sensor ................................................................... 8-14

8. Removing the Screen ............................................................................................ 8-15

9. Removing the Print Drum Body ............................................................................. 8-16

10. Removing the Ink Sensor PCB .............................................................................. 8-18

11. Removing the Squeegee Roller ............................................................................ 8-19

12. Removing the Print Drum Supports (R) and (F) .................................................... 8-22

Adjustment .......................................................................................................................... 8-25

1. Filter Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 8-25

2. Squeegee Gap Adjustment ................................................................................... 8-26

3. Ink Blocking Plate Position Adjustment ................................................................ 8-27

4. Squeegee Pressure Balance Adjustment ............................................................ 8-28

Page 103: RN Technical Manual

8 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

MASTER ON DRUM (IN PRINTING) CHECK MECHANISM

Mechanism

1. Master on Drum (in Printing) Check Mechanism

This mechanism checks whether there is a master on the print drum when printing begins.

The print drum begins to rotate when the START key is pressed, and when the print drum reaches the 75°position, the Master sensor [B] checks whether there is a master [C] on the print drum.

The information checked by the Master sensor [B] is stored until either the print drum is pulled out or thepower is switched off. Subsequent printing therefore starts immediately after the START key is pressed.

If light is not reflected back to the Master sensor [B] (implying that the master is absent) when the printdrum reaches the 75° position at the start of the printing, it is assumed that there is no master on the printdrum.

A: Light absorber strip

B: Master sensor (reflective type)

C: Master

B

C

A

B

Print drum75°position

Print drum75° position

Page 104: RN Technical Manual

8 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

PRINT DRUM SET MECHANISM

2. Print Drum Set Mechanism

The Print drum set sensor [A] checks whether the print drum is correctly set in the machine.

A light beam from the Print drum set sensor [A] is transmitted when the levers are gripped, and blockedwhen they are released.

The light beam of print drum set sensor [A] is therefore transmitted if the print drum is not correctly set inthe machine.

A: Print drum set sensor

Print drum set sensor light beam is blocked.

Print drum is assumed to be in place.Print drum set sensor light beam is transmitted.

Print drum is assumed not to be in place.

A

A A

Page 105: RN Technical Manual

8 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

INK CARTRIDGE SET SWITCH PCB

3. Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB

Different Ink cartridge set switch PCBs are used for the black ink and color ink print drums.

The black ink cartridge set switch PCB [A] has five sensors, while the color ink cartridge set switch PCB[B] has three sensors.

The sensors on the Ink cartridge set switch PCB determines whether correct ink for the print drum is setin place.

A: Ink cartridge set switch PCB (for black ink)

B: Ink cartridge set switch PCB (for color ink)

C: Ink cartridge set switch PCB sensors

D: Protrusion on the front end of the ink cartridge presses sensor actuator on the Print drum set switchPCB.

A

B

C

D

Page 106: RN Technical Manual

8 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

SQUEEGEE ROLLER ROTATION MECHANISM

4. Squeegee Roller Rotation Mechanism

The main motor drives the Joint gear [A] via the Junction gear ass’y [B], and this rotates the Print drummain gear [C].

The rotation also drives the Squeegee roller gear (R) [D] via the gears to rotate the Squeegee roller [E].

The Squeegee roller [E] drives the Driven shaft [H] via the Squeegee roller gear (F) [F].

The Squeegee roller gear (R) [D] contains a one-way clutch to prevent the Squeegee roller [E] fromrotating when the print drum is manually rotated in the reverse direction.

A: Joint gear

B: Junction gear ass’y

C: Print drum main gear

D: Squeegee roller gear (R)

E: Squeegee roller

F: Squeegee roller gear (F)

G: Doctor roller

H: Driven shaft

G H

C

DE

F

B

A

C

Page 107: RN Technical Manual

8 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

INKING MECHANISM

5. Inking Mechanism

When the main motor is operating and the print drum is rotating, if the ink bead moves away from the Inksensor [D], the inking motor activates to pump in the ink from the ink cartridge.

The ink pumped is fed via the hose onto the squeegee roller [E] from the holes in the Ink distributor [F].The inking motor is switched off when the ink reaches the Ink sensor [D].

The ink deposited on the squeegee roller [E] is made into ink bead between the Squeegee roller [E] andDoctor roller [A]. The Driven shaft is rotated to build a smooth ink bead.

The ink is transferred onto the print drum from Squeegee roller [E] via a small gap between the Squeegeeroller [E] and Doctor roller [A].

The Overflow sensor [C] checks to prevent ink from overflowing inside the print drum.

A: Doctor roller

B: Driven shaft

C: Overflow sensor

D: Ink sensor

E: Squeegee roller

F: Ink distributor

G: Ink bead

F

A

B

C

E

D

D

A

F EG

Page 108: RN Technical Manual

8 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM FRONT COVER, INK CARTRIDGE GUIDE ASS’Y, DRUM FRONT UPPER COVER

Removal and Assembly

1. Removing the Print Drum Front Cover, Ink Cartridge GuideAss’y, Drum Front Upper Cover

A: Print drum front cover

B: Ink cartridge guide ass’y

C: Drum front upper cover

D: Ink cartridge release lever

E: Mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs

F: Mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs

Removing the Print Drum Front Cover

(1) Remove the left- and right-hand mounting screws (M4 x 6: 1 pc each) [E] on the Print drum frontcover [A], and then remove the cover itself.

Removing the Ink Cartridge Guide Ass’y

(2) Pull the Ink cartridge release lever [D] and open the swing base.

(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [E] on the Ink cartridge guide ass’y [B], and thenremove it.

[Continued on next page]B

F

A

E

A

E

B CA

Page 109: RN Technical Manual

8 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM FRONT COVER, INK CARTRIDGE GUIDE ASS’Y, DRUM FRONT UPPER COVER

Removing the Drum Front Upper Cover

(4) Remove the Ink cartridge guide ass’y.

(5) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [E] on the Drum front upper cover [C], and thenremove without damaging the two hooks [F] at the inside bottom of the cover.

C: Drum Front Upper Cover

E: Mounting screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc)

F: Hooks (inside bottom of the cover)

C

E F

Page 110: RN Technical Manual

8 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE INK CARTRIDGE SET SWITCH COVER AND INK CARTRIDGE SET SWITCH PCB

2. Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch Cover and Ink CartridgeSet Switch PCB

Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch Cover

(1) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [C] on the Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover [A], andthen remove the cover.

A: Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover

B: Ink cartridge set switch PCB

C: Mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs

D: Mounting screws M4 x 6: 3 pcs

Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB

(2) Remove the four connectors on the Ink cartridge set switch PCB [B].

(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) [D] on the Ink cartridge set switch PCB [B], and thenremove the PCB.

A

C

B

D

Page 111: RN Technical Manual

8 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE INK CARTRIDGE SET SWITCH PCB MOUNTING BRACKET

3. Removing the Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB Mounting Bracket

(1) Pull out the print drum, pull out the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.

• rint drum front cover

• Ink cartridge guide ass’y

• Drum front upper cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover

• vInk cartridge set switch PCB

(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) [C] on the Ink cartridge set switch PCB mountingbracket [A], and remove the bracket.

A: Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket

B: Ink cartridge set switch PCB

C: Mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs)

A

B

C

Page 112: RN Technical Manual

8 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE SWING BASE ASS’Y

4. Removing the Swing Base Ass’y

(1) Pull out the print drum, pull out the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.

• Print drum front cover

• Ink cartridge guide ass’y

• Drum front upper cover

(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [C] on the Swing base ass’y [B].

(3) Push the Ink cartridge release lever ass’y [A] down, open the Swing base ass’y [B], and remove fromthe print drum.

A: Ink cylinder release lever ass’y

B: Swing base ass’y

C: Mounting screw (M4 x 6: 2 pcs)

B

A

C

Page 113: RN Technical Manual

8 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE INK CARTRIDGE GUIDE BOTTOM ASS’y

5. Removing the Ink Cartridge Guide Bottom Ass’y

(1) Pull out the print drum, pull out the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.

• Print drum front cover

• Ink cartridge guide ass’y

• Drum front upper cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket

• Swing base ass’y

(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [E] on the Ink intake nozzle [A], and detach the Ink intakenozzle [A] from the Nozzle bracket [B].

(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) [F] on the Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y [D], andremove the ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y [D].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• When mounting the Ink cartridge ass’y [D], engage the horizontal hooks into the Drum front supportass’y [C].

A: Ink intake nozzle

B: Nozzle mounting plate

C: Drum front support ass’y

D: Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y

E: Mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs)

F: Mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs)

A

B

E

C

D

F

Page 114: RN Technical Manual

8 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE INK PUMP UNIT AND INKING MOTOR

6. Removing the Ink Pump Unit and Inking Motor

Removing the Ink Pump Unit

(1) Pull out the print drum, pull out the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.

• Print drum front cover

• Ink cartridge guide ass’y

• Drum front upper cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket

• Swing base ass’y

• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y

(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) on the Grip lever [A], and remove the Grip lever [A].

(3) Remove the mounting screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc) [C] on the Pump cover [B], and remove the Pump cover [B].

(4) Pull out the Ink outlet nozzle [D] from the ink distributor.

(5) Unplug the Inking motor connector [E], remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) on the Inkpump unit [F], and remove the Ink pump unit [F].

A: Grip lever

B: Pump cover

C: Pump cover mounting screw

D: Ink outlet nozzle

E: Connector

F: Ink pump unit

Removing the Inking Motor

(4) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [F] on the Inking motor bracket [D], and then removethe Inking motor [E] together with its mounting bracket from the ink pump unit.

(5) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 4: 2 pcs) [G] on the Inking motor [E], and detach the Inkingmotor [E] from the Inking motor bracket [D].

D: Inking motor bracket

E: Inking motor

F: Mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs)

G: Mounting screws (M3 x 4: 2 pcs)

D E F

A BC

D EDF

G

Page 115: RN Technical Manual

8 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM SET SENSOR

7. Removing the Print Drum Set Sensor

(1) Pull out the print drum, pull out the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.

• Print drum front cover

• Ink cartridge guide ass’y

• Drum front upper cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket

• Swing base ass’y

• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y

(2) Remove the mounting screw (M3 x 6: 1 pc) [C] on the Print drum set sensor [B], and remove thesensor with the connector attached.

(3) Unplug the connector [A] from the Print drum set sensor [B].

A: Connector

B: Print drum set sensor

C: Mounting screw (M3 x 6: 1 pc)

A B C

Page 116: RN Technical Manual

8 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE SCREEN

8. Removing the Screen

[Suggestion prior to starting work]

• Attaching the Print drum stand [B] (Part No. 015-26836-002) to the rear of the Print drum side frameass’y [A] makes the work easier by keeping the print drum level.

(1) Make a confidential master, and pull out the print drum.

(2) Remove the two Screen springs [C].

(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs), which holds both the Clamp plate base [D] andthe Screen [E], and then pull the Screen [E] from underneath the Clamp plate base [D] toremove.

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Take care not to fold the Screen [E].

A: Print drum side frame ass’y

B: Print drum stand (015-26836-002)

C: Screen springs

D: Clamp plate base

E: Screen

C

D E

AB

Page 117: RN Technical Manual

8 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM BODY

9. Removing the Print Drum Body

(1) Make a confidential master, pull out the print drum, and remove the following component.

• Screen

(2) Remove the mounting screws (special screws: 2 pcs) [B] and remove the Clamp plate base [A].

(3) Peel off the tape [D] on the print drum body [C] alignment section. (Reuse the tape whenreassembling.)

(4) Remove the remaining 10 mounting screws (M4 x 8: 8 pcs and special screws: 2 pcs) on the Printdrum body [C], and remove the Print drum body [C].

[Continued on next page]

A: Clamp plate base

B: Special screws

C: Print drum body

D: Tape

E: Print drum support (F)

F: Print drum support (R)

A

C

B

E

F

C D

Page 118: RN Technical Manual

8 – 17RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM BODY

[Precautions on Reassembly: 1]

• Arrow marks are engraved on both sides of the Print drum body, and “F” is engraved at the front.Likewise, arrow marks are engraved on both the right and left Print drum supports.Align the arrow marks on the Drum body with those on the Print drum supports with the engraved“F” on the Drum body at the front. Then attach the Drum body onto the Print drum supports withmounting scres (M4 x 8: 2 pcs).Next attach the Special screws.

D: Tape

• Hook the Screen springs into the holes at the leading edges of the Print drum body, and hook theloop ends over the Special screws. Then attach the remaining screws while applying tension onthe Drum body with the springs. When nearing the last screws, remove the Screen springs andattach the remaining screws and Clamp plate base after checking the [Precautions on Reassembly:2] below.

[Precautions on Reassembly: 2]

• Before attaching the Clamp plate base to the Print drum body, affix the tape [D] to the joint section ofthe Print drum body [C]. If the tape originally attached to the print drum cannot be reused, insulationtape may be used. The tape is used to reduce the noise originating from the joint section of thePrint drum body during the printing.

D

Page 119: RN Technical Manual

8 – 18RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE INK SENSOR PCB

10. Removing the Ink Sensor PCB

(1) Pull out the print drum, and remove the following components.

• Screen

• Print drum body

(2) Unplug the connector on the Ink sensor PCB [B].

(3) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 8: 2 pcs) on the Ink sensor cover [A], and remove the Ink sensorcover [A] with the Ink sensor PCB [B] inside.

(4) Remove the Ink sensor PCB [B] from the Ink sensor cover [A].

[Work Precautions]

• Take care not to fold or bend the Ink sensor or Overflow sensor.If they are bent, straighten them out by hand.

[Checking after Reassembly]

• Check that the Ink sensor does not touch the Doctor roller or Driven shaft.

A: Ink sensor cover

B: Ink sensor PCB

A

A

B

Page 120: RN Technical Manual

8 – 19RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

11. Removing the Squeegee Roller

(1) Pull out the print drum, and remove the following components.

• Print drum front cover

• Ink cartridge guide ass’y

• Drum front upper cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket

• Swing base ass’y

• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y

• Ink pump unit

• Screen

• Print drum body

• Ink sensor PCB

(2) Remove the two mounting screws on the Junction gear ass’y [A], and remove the Junction gear ass’y[A].

REMOVING THE SQUEEGEE ROLLER

A: Junction gear ass’y

(3) Remove the mounting screws (3 x 6: 1 pc each) on the two Eccentric boss stopper plates [B], andremove the Eccentric bosses [C].

(4) With the print drum at position A, remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 1 pc each) on the Ink blockingplates [D] via the holes in the left and right Print drum supports.

[Continued on next page]

B: Eccentric boss stopper plate

C: Eccentric bosses

D: Ink blocking plates

A

C

D

B

B

Page 121: RN Technical Manual

8 – 20RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

(7) Remove the Pivot screw [F] on the front of the print drum via the opening in the Print drum support (F)where the Print drum lock plate ass’y was removed. Likewise, remove the Pivot screw [G] on thefront of the print drum via the opening in the Print drum support (R).

(8) Remove the Squeegee bottom ass’y [H] from the squeegee unit.

REMOVING THE SQUEEGEE ROLLER

(5) With the print drum at position-A, remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs each) on the Squeegeeframes [L] via the holes in the left and right Print drum supports.

[Continued on next page]

F: Pivot screw (print drum front)

G: Pivot screw (print drum rear)

H: Squeegee bottom ass’y

E: Print drum lock plate ass’y

(6) Remove the mounting screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc), and remove the Print drum lock plate ass’y [E].

L: Squeegee frames

L

E

F

G

H

Page 122: RN Technical Manual

8 – 21RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE SQUEEGEE ROLLER

(7) Remove the E-rings on both ends of the Squeegee roller [I], remove the gears [J], remove thebearings [K], and then remove the Squeegee roller [I] from the Squeegee frame [L].(The Doctor roller [M] and Driven shaft [N] will also come loose when removing the Squeegee roller[I], and are disassembled as shown below.)

I: Squeegee roller

J: Gear

K: Bearing

L: Squeegee frame

M: Doctor roller

N: Driven shaft

O: Joint gear

P: Joint gear positioning holes

Q: Junction gear ass’y

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Align the positioning hole [P] in the Joint gear [O] over the positioning holes in the Drum rear frameplate and Print drum main gear.

• Adjust the position of the Junction gear ass’y [Q] to allow a small amount of backlash between theJunction gear and the Joint gear [O] (and Print drum main gear).

[Adjustment after Reassembly]

• Squeegee gap adjustment

• Ink blocking plate position adjustment

• Squeegee pressure balance adjustment

O

P

Q

N M L K J

KJ L I

Page 123: RN Technical Manual

8 – 22RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM SUPPORTS (R) AND (F)

12. Removing the Print Drum Supports (R) and (F)

(1) Pull out the print drum, remove the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.

• Print drum front cover

• Ink cartridge guide ass’y

• Drum front upper cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket

• Swing base ass’y

• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y

• Screen

• Print drum body

(2) Unplug the connector on the Ink sensor PCB.

(3) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs) on the Junction gear ass’y [A], and remove the Junctiongear ass’y [A].

A: Junction gear ass’y

B: C-ring

C: Joint gear

D: Rear frame

E: Mounting screw (M4 x 6: 2 pcs)

F: Mounting screw (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)

(4) Remove the C-ring [B] retaining the Joint gear [C] on the ink distributor, and remove the Joint gear [C].

(5) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs) [E] retaining the Drum rear frame plate [D] to the printdrum side frame ass’y.

(6) Remove the screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs) [F] that hold the Drum rear frame plate [D] to the Drum shaftclamper [G], and slide out the Drum rear frame plate [D] from the ink distributor.

(7) Loosen the 3-mm Allen bolts [H] on the Drum shaft clamper [G], and slide out the Drum shaftclamper [G] from the ink distributor.

(8) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 12: 4 pcs) [J] on the Print drum main gear [I], and slide out thePrint drum main gear [I] from the ink distributor.

[Continued on next page]

G: Drum shaft clamper

H: 3-mm Allen bolts

I: Print drum main gear

J: Mounting screw(M4 x 12: 4 pcs)

K: Print drum support (R)

A

B

C

K

J

I

G

H

E

F

D

Page 124: RN Technical Manual

8 – 23RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM SUPPORTS (R) AND (F)

(9) Pull the print drum support (R) [K] from the ink distributor.

(10) Pull the Ink outlet nozzle [A] from the ink distributor.

(11) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 3 pcs) [B] on the Drum front support ass’y [C], and remove theDrum front support ass’y [C] from the drum shaft clamper.

A: Ink outlet nozzle

B: Mounting screws (M4 x 8: 3 pcs)

C: Drum front support ass’y

D: Drum shaft clamper

E: 3-mm Allen bolt

F: Junction wire harness

G: Print drum support (F)

(12) Loosen the 3-mm Allen bolt [E] on the Drum shaft clamper [D], and slide out the Drum shaft clamper[D] from the ink distributor.

(13) Slide out the Print drum support (F) [G] from the ink distributor, and pull the junction wire harness [F]out through the Print drum support (F) [G].

[Continued on next page]

A

B

C

G

F

D

E

Page 125: RN Technical Manual

8 – 24RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

REMOVING THE PRINT DRUM SUPPORTS (R) AND (F)

A: Drum front support ass’y

B: Print drum support (F)

C: Tool (Print drum JIG)

D: Print drum support (R)

E: Drum rear frame plate

[Precautions on Reassembly: 1]

• Use the tool (Print drum JIG) when tightening the drum shaft clamper mounting screws.

F: Joint gear

G: Joint gear positioning holes

H: Junction gear ass’y

[Precautions on Reassembly: 2]

• Align the positioning hole [G] in the Joint gear [F] over the positioning holes in the Drum rear frameplate and Print drum main gear.

• Adjust the position of the Junction gear ass’y [H] to allow a small amount of backlash between theJunction gear and the Joint gear [F] (and Print drum main gear).

• Move the print drum to position A, insert the tool (Print drum JIG) through the holes in the Drum frontsupport ass’y [A], Print drum support (F) [B], Print drum support (R) [D], and Drum rear frame plate[E], and then tighten the Allen bolts on both Drum shaft clampers.

Print drum JIG

015-26128-008

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Page 126: RN Technical Manual

8 – 25RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

FILTER CLEANING

Adjustment

1. Filter Cleaning

(1) Pull out the print drum, remove the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.

• Ink cartridge guide ass’y

• Drum front upper cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket

(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 6: 2 pcs and M3 x 10: 2 pcs) on the Ink intake nozzle [A], andremove the nozzle.

(3) Remove the Filter [B] and clean it.

[Symptoms]

• If foreign matter is drawn into the filter, ink will no longer be drawn in, resulting in a lack of ink in theprint drum.

A: Ink intake nozzle

B: Filter

C: Lug and slot

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Mount the Filter [B] with the rounded top facing upwards.

• Engage the lug on the bottom of the Ink intake nozzle [A] into the slot in the lower base [C].

B

A

Top

Bottom

C

Page 127: RN Technical Manual

8 – 26RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

SQUEEGEE GAP ADJUSTMENT

2. Squeegee Gap Adjustment

(1) Pull out the print drum, and remove the following components.

• Screen

• Print drum body

(2) Clean out the ink inside the squeegee unit.

(3) Using a feeler gauge, check that the gap between the Squeegee roller and Doctor roller is inspecified setting (0.08 mm ±0.02 mm at front and rear).

(4) If the gap is outside the specifications, loosen the retaining screw on the Doctor roller adjust plate [A]with 3mm Allen wrench.

(5) Insert the Allen wrench [C] into the hole in the Doctor roller adjust plate [A], and make the adjustmentby moving the adjustment plate.

(6) Tighten the retaining screw.

[Symptoms]

• If the gap is too large, more ink than is necessary will be transferred onto the inside surface of theprint drum, causing ink to leak.

• Conversely, if the gap is too small, insufficient ink will be transferred onto the inside surface of theprint drum, possibly resulting in uneven printing density due to lack of ink.

A: Doctor roller adjust plate

B: Allen bolt for 3 mm Allen wrench

C: 2.5 mm Allen wrench

Rear

Front

Reduce

Increase

B

A

C

Reduce

Increase

Page 128: RN Technical Manual

8 – 27RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

INK BLOCKING PLATE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

3. Ink Blocking Plate Position Adjustment

Front

(1) Pull out the print drum, remove the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.

• Print drum front cover

• Ink cartridge guide ass’y

• Drum front upper cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket

• Swing base ass’y

• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y

• Ink pump unit

(2) Loosen the mounting screw on the Ink blocking plate (F) [A] via the opening in the Print drumsupport (F).

(3) Insert a slot-head screwdriver into the slot in the Ink blocking plate (F) [A] and move the plate untilit is flush with the inside surface of the print drum. Tighten the mounting screw.

Rear

(1) Pull out the print drum, and loosen the mounting screw on the Ink blocking plate (R) [B] via theopening in the Print drum support (R).

(2) Insert a slot-head screwdriver into the slot in the Ink blocking plate (R) [B] and move the plate untilit is flush with the inside surface of the print drum. Tighten the mounting screw.

[Symptoms]

• If the ink blocking plates are not flush with the inside surface of the print drum, they will not be ableto block the ink exuded to the ends of the Squeegee roller. Ink will accumulate inside the print drum,and in the worst cases, ink may leak out from the print drum body.

A: Ink blocking plate (F)

B: Ink blocking plate (R)AB

Page 129: RN Technical Manual

8 – 28RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

SQUEEGEE PRESSURE BALANCE ADJUSTMENT

4. Squeegee Pressure Balance Adjustment

(1) Create a master with test chart No. 15 and print to check the left and right print density balance.

(2) If the left and right print density is not balanced, adjust as shown below.

Front

(3) Pull out the print drum, remove the ink cartridge, and remove the following components.

• Print drum front cover

• Ink cartridge guide ass’y

• Drum front upper cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB cover

• Ink cartridge set switch PCB mounting bracket

• Swing base ass’y

• Ink cartridge guide bottom ass’y

• Ink pump unit

(4) Loosen the two retaining screws on the squeegee frame via the opening in the Print drum support (F).

(5) Insert a slot-head screwdriver via the opening in the Print drum support (F), turn the Eccentricboss [A], and adjust so that the gap between the squeegee roller and the print drum body isapprox. 0.3 mm.

(6) Tighten the two retaining screws [B] on the squeegee frame.

Rear

(3) Pull out the print drum, remove the ink cartridge, and remove the following component.

• Junction gear ass’y

(4) Loosen the two retaining screws on the squeegee frame via the opening in the Print drum support(R).

(5) Insert a slot-head screwdriver via the opening in the Print drum support (R), turn the Eccentric boss[A], and adjust so that the gap between the squeegee roller and the print drum body is approx. 0.3mm.

(6) Tighten the two retaining screws [B] on the squeegee frame.

A: Eccentric boss

B: Retainingscrews

A

B

Rear

Front

Page 130: RN Technical Manual

8 – 29RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

SQUEEGEE PRESSURE BALANCE ADJUSTMENT

[Continued on next page]

• Using your finger, press the print drum from underneath, and adjust the gap to approx. 0.3 mm.

[Checking after Adjustment]

• Run an actual print after the adjustment to check the left and right print density balance.If the left and right print density balance is incorrect, the squeegee pressure must be readjusted.

[Symptoms]

• Incorrect left and right squeegee pressure causes unbalanced print density.

• If the squeegee pressure is too high (gap too small), more ink than is needed will be transferredonto the print drum and may cause ink leakage.

• If the squeegee pressure is too low (gap too large), the print density will be reduced, and excessload will be applied on the print drum and may shorten the life of the drum body.

Page 131: RN Technical Manual

8 – 30RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 8. PRINT DRUM SECTION

[Memo]

Page 132: RN Technical Manual

9 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 9: MASTER CLAMP SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ............................................................................................................................9-2

1. Clamp Unit Home Positioning Mechanism .............................................................9-2

2. Clamp Plate Master Release Mechanism ...............................................................9-3

3. Clamp Plate Master Clamp Mechanism ..................................................................9-4

Removal and Assembly ........................................................................................................9-5

1. Removing the Clamp Unit ........................................................................................9-5

2. Removing the Clamp Motor, Clamp Sensor A, Clamp Sensor B ............................9-6

Page 133: RN Technical Manual

9 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 9. MASTER CLAMP SECTION

CLAMP UNIT HOME POSITIONING MECHANISM

Mechanism

1. Clamp Unit Home Positioning Mechanism

When the START key is pressed to create confidential or normal masters, the Clamp open arm [A] andMaster release arm [B] are checked to ensure that they have returned to the home position (with the lightpaths to both Clamp sensors A [F] and B [G] open). If they are not at the home position, the Clamp motor[C] is activated to move the Clamp cam assembly [D] and return the Clamp open arm [A] and Masterrelease arm [B] to the home position until the light paths to both Clamp sensors A [F] and B [G] are open.

A: Clamp open arm

B: Master release arm

C: Clamp motor

D: Clamp cam assembly

E: Clamp encoder sensor

F: Clamp sensor A

G: Clamp sensor B

A

BC

D E

View in the directionof the arrow

F

G

Page 134: RN Technical Manual

9 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 9. MASTER CLAMP SECTION

CLAMP PLATE MASTER RELEASE MECHANISM

2. Clamp Plate Master Release Mechanism

When the START key is pressed to create confidential or normal masters, the print drum makes one turnand checks for the presence of master on the print drum. Once the presence of a master on the drumhas been checked, the drum returns to position-A, and the clamp plate master release operation starts.

The clamp motor activates and rotates the Clamp cam assembly [A]. This pushes down the Clamp openarm [B] and opens the Clamp plate [C]. The Master release arm [D] is then pushed down, and the Masterrelease bar [E] is raised, releasing the master from the Clamp plate [C].

The clamp motor continues to run, and raises the Clamp open arm [B] and Master release arm [D]. Themotor is switched off once the light path to Clamp sensor B [G] is opened.

A: Clamp cam assembly

B: Clamp open arm

C: Clamp plate

D: Master release arm

E: Master release bar

F: Clamp sensor A

G: Clamp sensor B

(1) The Clamp open arm is pusheddown, opening the Clamp plate.

(2) The Master release arm is pusheddown, raising the Master releasebar and releasing the master.

(3) The Clamp open arm and Masterrelease arm are raised, and themotor switches off once the lightpath to Clamp sensor B is opened.

F

G

A

B

C

D

E

Page 135: RN Technical Manual

9 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 9. MASTER CLAMP SECTION

CLAMP PLATE MASTER CLAMP MECHANISM

3. Clamp Plate Master Clamp Mechanism

As the used master is removed from the print drum, the print drum makes one revolution and returns toposition-A, and the clamp plate master clamp operation starts.

The clamp motor activates and rotates the Clamp cam assembly [A]. This pushes down the Clamp openarm [E] and opens the Clamp plate [B].

The clamp motor is switched off once the light path to Clamp sensor A [D] is opened. (It stops withClamp plate [B] still open.)

The load pulse motor feeds a set amount of the master [G] onto the print drum, and the clamp motoractivates to rotate the Clamp cam [A] and raise the Clamp open arm [E].

The clamp motor is switched off once the light path to Clamp sensor B [F] is opened. (The clamp unit isreturned to the home position.)

(1) The Clamp open arm [E] is pushed down, opening the Clamp plate [B]. The clamp motor is switchedoff once the light path to Clamp sensor A [D] is opened (with Clamp plate [B] still open).

A: Clamp cam assembly

B: Clamp plate

C: Clamp encoder

D: Clamp sensor A

E: Clamp open arm

F: Clamp sensor B

G: Master

(2) The master [G] is fed onto the print drum, and the clamp motor is switched on, raising the Clampopen arm [E]. The clamp motor is switched off once the light path to Clamp sensor B [F] is opened.(Returns to home position.)

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

E

F

B

G

Page 136: RN Technical Manual

9 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 9. MASTER CLAMP SECTION

REMOVING THE CLAMP UNIT

Removal and Assembly

1. Removing the Clamp Unit

(1) Remove the rear cover.

(2) Remove the Main PCB.

(3) Unplug the clamp motor connector [A] and sensor connector [B].

(4) Remove the mounting screws (M4 x 8: 3 pcs) [C] on the clamp unit, and remove the clamp unit.

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Align the half-pierced sections.

A: Clamp motor connector

B: Clamp sensor connector

C: Clamp unit mounting screw

A

B C C

C

Page 137: RN Technical Manual

9 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 9. MASTER CLAMP SECTION

REMOVING THE CLAMP MOTOR, CLAMP SENSOR A, CLAMP SENSOR B

2. Removing the Clamp Motor, Clamp Sensor A, Clamp Sensor B

Removing the Clamp Motor

(1) Remove the following components.

• Rear cover

• Main PCB

• Clamp unit

(2) Remove the E-ring and remove the Worm gear [A].

(3) Unplug the connector [C], remove the mounting screws, and remove the Clamp motor [B].

Removal of Clamp Sensor A

(1) Remove the following components.

• Rear cover

• Main PCB

• Clamp unit

(2) Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 6: 2 pcs) and remove the Shaft support bracket [D].

(3) Unplug the connector and remove Clamp sensor A [E].

Removal of Clamp Sensor B

(1) Remove the following components.

• Rear cover

• Main PCB

• Clamp unit

(2) Remove the mounting screw (M3 x 6: 1 pc) and remove the sensor bracket [F].

(3) Unplug the connector and remove Clamp sensor B [G] from the sensor bracket [F].

A: Worm gear

B: Clamp motor

C: Connector

D: Shaft support bracket

E: Clamp sensor A

F: Sensor bracket

G: Clamp sensor B

A

B

E

F

CD

G

Page 138: RN Technical Manual

10 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10: MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... 10-2

1. Master Removal Mechanism ................................................................................. 10-2

2. Master on the Drum (before Master Removal) Check Mechanism ...................... 10-3

3. Removed Master Vertical Transport Mechanism .................................................. 10-4

4. Disposed Master Compression Mechanism ....................................................... 10-5

5. Disposal Box Safety Switch ................................................................................... 10-8

Removal and Assembly ..................................................................................................... 10-9

1. Removing the Master Removal Hook ................................................................... 10-9

2. Removing the Master Removal Unit .................................................................... 10-10

3. Removing the Master Disposal Gate Housing ................................................... 10-12

4. Removing the Master Removal Roller (Bottom) ................................................. 10-13

5. Removing the Master Compression Plate .......................................................... 10-14

6. Removing the Motors ........................................................................................... 10-16

Page 139: RN Technical Manual

10 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

MASTER REMOVAL MECHANISM

Mechanism

1. Master Removal Mechanism

Masters on the print drum are removed as follows.

(1) At the start of master removal, the Master sensor [A] checks whether the master to be removed on theprint drum actually exists.

(2) The clamp plate master removal operation is performed with the print drum at position A to releasethe leading edge of the master from the clamp plate.

(3) The Master removal hook [B] then detaches the master from the print drum as the drum is rotated.

(4) The removed master is fed into the Master compression plate [C].

(5) The removed master is then compressed, and disposed of in the Master disposal box [D].

A: Master sensor

B: Master removal hook

C: Master compression plate

D: Master disposal box

B

CA

D

Page 140: RN Technical Manual

10 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

MASTER ON THE DRUM (BEFORE MASTER REMOVAL) CHECK MECHANISM

2. Master on the Drum (before Master Removal) Check Mecha-nism

When creating confidential or normal masters, the print drum moves to position A, and with the print drumat the 75° position, the Master sensor [A] checks whether or not there is a master [B] on the drum. (Thecheck operation is not performed if information that a master is present has already been stored in themachine’s memory.) The drum rotation angle for the check can be adjusted using test mode No. 580.

If the light from the Master sensor [B] is reflected back, (master present), the master removal sensorchecks whether the master is sent to the master disposal box or not during the master removal.

A: Master sensor

B: Master

C: Light absorber strip

B

C

A

Print drum75° position

Page 141: RN Technical Manual

10 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

REMOVED MASTER VERTICAL TRANSPORT MECHANISM

3. Removed Master Vertical Transport Mechanism

When the clamp unit is operated to release the leading edge of the master from the clamp plate, theMaster removal motor [A] activates, rotating the Vertical transport rollers [B, C, D, E, F]. The main motoralso rotates the print drum at the same time.

The master is fed between the rollers and pushed into the Master compression plate [H].

The master is guided here by the Master removal hook [G] and G belt [J].

The main motor and Master removal motor [A] stop once the print drum has rotated to position-A. (Thetime at which the master removal motor stops can be adjusted using test mode No. 382.)

When the print drum reaches the 70° and 90° positions, the Master removal sensor [I] checks whether themaster is being fed correctly to the master disposal box. (These drum angles can be adjusted using testmodes No. 380 and 381.)

The master removal hook is normally located at a fixed position close to the print drum, but shifts awayfrom the drum when the drum is pulled out.

The print drum rotation speed during master removal can be adjusted using test mode No. 387.

A: Master removal motor

B: Pulley shaft

C: Master removal roller (top)

D: Master removal pulley (top)

E: Master removal pulley (bottom)

F: Master removal roller (bottom)

G: Master removal hook

H: Master compression plate

I: Master removal sensor

J: G belt

A

BCD

E F G

H

I J

Page 142: RN Technical Manual

10 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

DISPOSED MASTER COMPRESSION MECHANISM

4. Disposed Master Compression Mechanism

1) Initializing

• If the light path on the Master compression sensor [B] is open when the power is switched ON orwhen everything is reset, the master compression motor operates in the compression direction,and when the light path to the master compression sensor is blocked, it operates in reverse untilthe light path is open again.

• If the light path to the Master compression sensor [B] is blocked when the power is switched ON orwhen everything is reset, the master compression motor operates in the return direction until thelight path is open again.

• If the light path to the Master compression sensor [B] is blocked when starting master removal, themaster compression motor operates in the return direction until the light path is open. (The initializ-ing operation is not performed if the light path to the master compression sensor is open whenstarting master removal.)

2) Master compression

Once the removed master vertical transport operation is complete, the master compression motoroperates in the compression direction to lower the Master compression plate [A]. The light path tothe master compression sensor is briefly blocked by the Master compression sensor plate [C].

When the light path to the master compression sensor is subsequently opened again, the mastercompression motor stops (the stop time can be adjusted using test mode No. 384), and thenoperates in the return direction to return the master compression plate to its home position.

3) Ejection of removed master

The master removed by the vertical transport operation is pushed inside the Master compressionplate [A]. Compression is performed by the master removal motor rotating the Master compressionplate [A] on the Pivot shaft [D]. The Piston shaft link [E] also rotates, but it rotates on the Piston shaft[F] rather than on the Pivot shaft [D]. This causes the Piston block [G] to move in the direction inwhich the master ejects out.

A: Master compression plate

B: Master compression sensor

C: Master compression sensor plate

D: Pivot shaft

E: Piston shaft link

F: Piston shaft

G: Piston block

D

E

F

G

B AC

Page 143: RN Technical Manual

10 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

DISPOSED MASTER COMPRESSION MECHANISM

4) Disposed-master-full detection

The removed-master-full detection is performed using the following two mechanisms, and a master-full indication is displayed by either.

(1) The number of masters removed after resetting following the previous master-full indication iscounted, and the master disposal box is determined as full when the count reaches the presetvalue.

* The preset master-full count can be set using test mode No. 386.

The master count is not incremented if a master removal error occurs or if the master to beremoved is not detected on the print drum.

(2) Mechanism for mechanically determining that the master disposal box is full (see below.)

Once the light beam of the master compressionsensor is blocked by the master compression sensorplate, the compression operation stops, and themaster compression plate returns to the homeposition.

Once the master inside the master disposal box hasbeen sufficiently compressed, the mastercompression plate stops rotating, but the mastercompression sensor plate continues to rotate.(The master compression plate is mounted to thepivot shaft via a spring, whereas the mastercompression sensor plate is mounted directly to thepivot shaft.)

When the master compression motor operates to startmaster compression, the master compressionsensor is immediately blocked by the mastercompression sensor plate. As the operationcontinues, the disposal box full sensor is brieflyblocked by the master compression plate, but is thenopened.

At the start of compression, the light paths to themaster compression sensor and disposal box fullsensors are open.

Disposal box fullsensor

Pivot shaft

Master compression plate

Master compression sensor plate

Master compression sensor

Page 144: RN Technical Manual

10 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

DISPOSED MASTER COMPRESSION MECHANISM

When the master disposal box becomes full, themaster compression plate stops rotating before theremoved-master-full sensor is blocked.

When the light path to the master compressionsensor is open and the removed-master-full sensor isnot blocked, the master-disposal-box-full indication isdisplayed.

Page 145: RN Technical Manual

10 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

DISPOSAL BOX SAFETY SWITCH

5. Disposal Box Safety Switch

The master disposal box safety switch checks whether the master disposal box and master disposalgate housing are properly positioned.

If the master disposal gate housing is locked and correctly set, the bracket on the master disposal gatehousing is positioned close to the safety switch.

When the master disposal box is mounted, the safety switch unit moves back, and the safety switch ispushed against the master disposal gate housing.

The master disposal box full indication is reset if the master disposal box safety switch is released (themaster disposal box removed) for more than 5 seconds. The master disposal box count memory is alsoreset to zero.

Master disposal gate housing

Safety switch

Master disposal box

Page 146: RN Technical Manual

10 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

REMOVING THE MASTER REMOVAL HOOK

Removal and Assembly

1. Removing the Master Removal Hook

(1) Pull out the print drum, switch off the power, and remove the front cover.

(2) Remove the spring [A] from the master removal hook bracket.

(3) Remove the bearing fixing plate [B]. (M4 x 8: 1 pc)

(4) Remove the Master removal hook [C] together with the master removal hook bracket. (If it cannot beremoved, it is caught on the front screw of the master removal unit mounting screws. Remove thisscrew.)

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Do not drop the inside bearing when mounting the master removal hook bracket.

A: Spring of the master removal hook bracket

B: Bearing fixing plate

C: Master removal hook bracket and master removal hook

B

C

A

Page 147: RN Technical Manual

10 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

REMOVING THE MASTER REMOVAL UNIT

2. Removing the Master Removal Unit

(1) Move the scanner table to the servicing position [A].

(2) Remove the front and rear covers.

(3) Remove the upper housing cover (master removal unit cover). (M3 x 6: 2 pcs)

(4) Unlock the Release lever [B], fully open the Master disposal gate housing [C], and pull out the masterdisposal gate housing horizontally in the direction of paper ejection. The master disposal gatehousing is slotted into the Pivot shafts [D] on both sides. The shafts are cut as shown in the diagrambelow, and so the master disposal gate housing can be pulled out provided it is opened sufficiently.

A: Servicing position

B: Release lever

C: Master disposal gate housing

D: Pivot shaft

B

C

D

A

Page 148: RN Technical Manual

10 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

REMOVING THE MASTER REMOVAL UNIT

(5) Remove the master removal unit mounting screws (M4 x 8: 4 pcs).

(6) Detach the connectors on both sides, and remove the master removal unit.

Page 149: RN Technical Manual

10 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

REMOVING THE MASTER DISPOSAL GATE HOUSING

3. Removing the Master Disposal Gate Housing

(1) Remove the E-rings and bearings on both sides of the Pulley shaft [B], and remove the Pulley shaft.

(2) Remove the E-rings, bearings, and gears on both sides of the Master removal roller (top) [A], andremove the roller.

(3) Remove the G belts [D] from the Master removal pulleys (top) [C].

A: Master removal roller (top)

B: Pulley shaft

C: Master removal pulleys (top)

D: G belts

E: Master disposal gate housing

B

C

A ED

Page 150: RN Technical Manual

10 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

REMOVING THE MASTER REMOVAL ROLLER (BOTTOM)

4. Removing the Master Removal Roller (Bottom)

(1) Loosen the screws on the Tension roller [A], and remove the belt [B]. (M3 x 6: 2 pcs)

(2) Remove the E-rings, bearings, gears, and pulleys on both sides of the Master removal roller (bottom)[C], and remove the roller.

(3) Remove the G belts [D].

A: Tension roller

B: Belt

C: Master removal roller (bottom)

D: G belt

B

C

A

D

Page 151: RN Technical Manual

10 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

REMOVING THE MASTER COMPRESSION PLATE

5. Removing the Master Compression Plate

(1) Remove the E-rings and bearings from both sides of the compression shaft [A].

(2) Rotate the compression shaft to move the master Compression plate [C] to the master compressingposition.Lifting up the compression gear [B] together with the shaft, to disengage the gear, allowing the shaftto be rotated.

(3) Remove the E-rings on both sides of the Piston shaft [D], and remove the shaft.

(4) Remove the Piston shaft links [E] on both sides.

AJ

B

C

D

E

Page 152: RN Technical Manual

10 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

REMOVING THE MASTER COMPRESSION PLATE

(5) Remove the shaft from the unit, with the master compression plate attached.

A: Compression shaft

B: Compression gear

C: Master compression plate

D: Piston shaft

E: Piston shaft link

F: Piston block

G: Compression plate holder

H: Compression spring

I: Master compression sensor plate

J: Compression plate guard cover (* master anti-clamping component)

(6) Remove the Piston blocks [F].

(7) Unhook the Compression spring [H] from the Compression plate holder [G], and then remove thecompression plate holder from the Compression shaft [A].

(8) Remove the Master compression sensor plate [I] and then separate the Master compression platefrom the compression shaft.

C

F

G H

C

I

Page 153: RN Technical Manual

10 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 10. MASTER REMOVAL SECTION

REMOVING THE MOTORS

6. Removing the Motors

(1) Remove the Master removal motor [A]. (Mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs)

(2) Remove the Compression motor [B]. (Mounting screws M4 x 6: 2 pcs)

(3) Remove the E-rings, and then remove the Safety switch unit [C].

A: Master removal motor

B: Compression motor

C: Safety switch unit

ABC

Page 154: RN Technical Manual

11 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11: FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

Contents

Mechanism .......................................................................................................................... 11-2

1. Scanner Table Setting System ............................................................................... 11-2

2. Original Scanning Mechanism ............................................................................... 11-4

3. Flat Bed Initialization Movement ............................................................................. 11-6

4. Stage Glass Original Detection System ................................................................. 11-8

5. Flat Bed Automatic Base Control ......................................................................... 11-10

6. FB Original Scanning Mechanism........................................................................ 11-12

Removal and Assembly .................................................................................................... 11-14

1. Removing the Scanner Unit ................................................................................. 11-14

2. Removing the Stage Glass .................................................................................. 11-16

3. Removing the Flat Bed Original Detection Sensor .............................................. 11-17

4. Removing the Lamp ............................................................................................. 11-18

5. Removing the Lens Ass’y ..................................................................................... 11-20

Adjustment ......................................................................................................................... 11-22

1. Flat Bed Read Pulse Motor Speed Adjustment ................................................... 11-22

2. FB Scan Start Position Adjustment ...................................................................... 11-23

3. FB Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment ............................................................. 11-24

Page 155: RN Technical Manual

11 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

SCANNER TABLE SETTING SYSTEM

Mechanism

1. Scanner Table Setting System

The Flat bed set switch [B] checks whether or not the Scanner table [A] has been set correctly.

This switch also acts as a Safety switch, which cuts the power supply to the main motor and clamp motor,and thermal power to the TPH if the scanner table is open.

A: Scanner table

B: Flat bed set switch

C: Damper spring

D: Scanner unit support shaft

E: Scanner table open lever

A

BC

D

E

Page 156: RN Technical Manual

11 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION

SCANNER TABLE SETTING SYSTEM

[Memo]

Page 157: RN Technical Manual

11 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

2. Original Scanning Mechanism

The FB read pulse motor [J] drives the front and rear Wire spool pulleys [G] via the 2-stage reductionpulleys linked by the Timing belts [H], [I]. The front and rear wire spool pulleys are configuredsymmetrically.

The wire [S] has one end secured to the frame via Coil spring [A], and is wound onto Sliding pulley No. 2[E] mounted on the Mirror carriage [B]. It is wound approximately 6.5 times around the rear wire spoolpulley [G] via the Fixed pulley [F] secured to the frame. It is then attached to the Lamp carriage [C] andthen secured to the frame via Sliding pulley No. 1 [D] mounted on the Mirror carriage [B]. The Lampcarriage [C] carries two original illumination Lamps [K] (and lamp inverters) and Mirror No. 1 [M], and themirror carriage carries the two mirrors [N], [O].

The mechanism uses a “full/half-rate mirror scanning” system, in which the mirror carriage moves 1/2 Lmm as the lamp carriage moves L mm in the same direction. This means that when the FB read pulsemotor [J] is activated, the original surface can be scanned while maintaining a constant distance betweenthe original and the center of the lens mounted on the frame. The original on the scanner tableilluminated by the lamp is reflected via mirrors No. 1, 2, and 3, and is then focused onto the CCD [R] bythe lens [Q] in the lens ass’y [P].

B CF

J

K

P

Page 158: RN Technical Manual

11 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION

ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

A: Spring

B: Mirror carriage

C: Lamp carriage

D: Sliding pulley No. 1

E: Sliding pulley No. 2

F: Fixed pulley

G: Wire spool pulley

H: Scanner timing belt 1

I: Scanner timing belt 2

J: Flat bed read pulse motor

Drive system diagram

Optical system diagram

K: Lamp

L: Stage glass

M: Mirror No. 1

N: Mirror No. 2

O: Mirror No. 3

P: Lens ass’y

Q: Lens

R: CCD

S: Wire

A

B

CD

EF

G

HI

S

J

KL

M

N

O

PB

C

Q R

Page 159: RN Technical Manual

11 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

FLAT BED INITIALIZATION MOVEMENT

3. Flat Bed Initialization Movement

Initialization is performed in the following situations to bring the flat bed unit to standby mode.

• When power is switched on

• When everything has been reset

Initialization operationThe Image scanner ADF shading sensor [A] is checked, and if it is OFF (light path open), the Flat-bedread pulse motor [B] is activated in the return direction until the light path is blocked, and moves the Lampcarriage [C] towards the left in the photograph. Once the image scanner ADF shading sensor is ON(blocked), it is moved a further 3 mm before the operation ends. (This position is the “standby position”.)The actuator plate of the image scanner ADF shading sensor is fixed to the lamp carriage.

No movement is made when the image scanner ADF shading sensor is ON (blocked).

(1) If the image scanner ADF shading sensor does not switch to ON when the flat bed read pulse motoris moved 487 mm in the return direction, the flat bed read pulse motor is assumed to be locked, and“T14-100” is displayed.

When image scanner ADF shading sensor is OFF

Image scanner ADFshading sensor

3 mm

Operation ends

Return

Start

Flat bed readpulse motor

on

(1)

Page 160: RN Technical Manual

11 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION

A

BC

FLAT BED INITIALIZATION MOVEMENT

A: Image scanner ADF shading sensor

B: Flat bed read pulse motor

C: Lamp carriage

Page 161: RN Technical Manual

11 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

STAGE GLASS ORIGINAL DETECTION SYSTEM

4. Stage Glass Original Detection System

The Flat bed original detection sensor [B] checks whether an original is placed on the Stage glass [A].The Flat bed original detection sensor [B] performs its check as soon as the Stage cover [C] is closedhalfway, blocking the light path to the Stage cover sensor [D].

If the light path to the Flat bed original detection sensor [B] is open (original present), the Master-Making/Print indication on the panel switches to “Master-Making”, and the thermal pressure motor is activated tolower the thermal head until the TPH pressure sensor switches ON.

At the same time, the lamp illuminates until the shading compensation is made (automatic base controloperation is also performed if original scanning intensity is set to “Auto”), and the lamp carriage returns tothe scanning start standby position and waits. If START key is not pressed within 60 seconds, the lampturns off and the lamp carriage returns to the standby position.

A: Stage glass

B: Flat bed original detection sensor

C: Stage cover

D: Stage cover sensor

ABC D

Page 162: RN Technical Manual

11 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION

STAGE GLASS ORIGINAL DETECTION SYSTEM

Stage cover sensor

41 mm 8 mm 15 mm 2.6 mm 2.6 mm 20.2 mm

100 ms 100 ms 100 ms100 ms

Set originalTo FB scanning

operation 1To FB scanning

operation 1

Press

Feed Feed

Feed FeedShading adjustment

Return

Flat bed automatic base control

Standby position Scanning startstandby position

Scanning startstandby position

Image scanner ADFshading sensor

Flat bed read pulse motor

Lamp

TPH pressure sensor

Thermal pressure motor

Flat bed originaldetection sensor

OFF

ON

Page 163: RN Technical Manual

11 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

FLAT BED AUTOMATIC BASE CONTROL

5. Flat Bed Automatic Base Control

This operation is performed after the shading compensation for line mode only when the originalscanning density is set to “Auto”. (It is not performed in photo, line/photo, dot, and book modes.)

When the START key is pressed, the lamp illuminates, and the flat bed read pulse motor activates in thescanning direction. It moves 41 mm after the image scanner ADF shading sensor switches from ON toOFF, and then pauses for a set period. Shading compensation is then performed while it moves 8 mm,and it then moves 15 mm (9 mm from the leading edge of the original) before the image sensor scansthe surface density of the original. After this, the lamp carriage moves approximately 2.6 mm twice andscans the surface density of the original. (Total 3 times)

The flat bed read pulse motor then operates in reverse (in the return direction) to return the lamp carriageto the scanning start standby position, and proceeds to FB scanning operation 1.

A: Original stopper

B: Shading plate

C: Original

D: Stage glass

Scanning line (lamp carriage) when image scanner ADF shadingsensor switches from ON to OFF

A B C

D

55 mm

18 mm0.8 mm

9 mm 2.6 mm 2.6 mm

Page 164: RN Technical Manual

11 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION

FLAT BED AUTOMATIC BASE CONTROL

41 mm 8 mm 15 mm 2.6 mm 2.6 mm 20.2 mm

100 ms 100 ms 100 ms100 ms

Thermal pressuremotor

Standby position Scanning startstandby position

ReturnFeed

START key ON To FB scanning operation 1

Shading compensation

Scanning startstandby position

Image scanner ADFshading sensor

Flat bed read pulse motor

Lamp

TPH pressure sensor

Feed

Feed Feed

OFF

ON

Page 165: RN Technical Manual

11 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

FB ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

6. FB Original Scanning Mechanism

This scanning operation describes the following situations. One is in which the ABC (Auto Base Control)is not performed. The other is when the START key is pressed within 60 seconds of placing the originalon the stage glass (START from FB original scanning operation 1), and when the START key is pressedafter 60 seconds.

If the START key is pressed after 60 seconds have elapsed, the lamp [B] illuminates, and the Flat bedread pulse motor [A] activates in the feed direction. The Lamp carriage [C] moves to the shadingcompensation position, and shading compensation is performed. (See the previous section for the casein which line mode is selected with original scanning density set at “Auto”, i.e. with ABC.)

It then moves a preset distance in the scanning direction (to the right) from the scanning start standbyposition, and the write pulse motor activates. It then moves a further preset distance, switching ON theread/write signal and initiating scan of the original. (The master making process starts at the same time.)

Once the master making for the size of the original is made, the read/write signal is switched OFF, andscanning ends. (The master making process also ends at the same time.) The Flat bed read pulsemotor [A] moves the lamp carriage a further 3 mm in the scanning direction before stopping. The Lamp[B] turns off, and the scanning operation is complete.

The Lamp carriage [C] then returns to the standby position. (Flat bed initialization operation)

A: Flat bed read pulse motor

B: Lamp

C: Lamp carriage

AB

C

Page 166: RN Technical Manual

11 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION

FB ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

* L = paper size set by the Users Mode.Adjustment value b = Adjusted by test mode No. 181 (Flat bed scanning start position adjustment)Adjustment value c = Adjusted by test mode No. 281 (Master making start position adjustment)Adjustment value d = Adjusted by test mode No. 282 (Master making length adjustment)

41 mm 8 mm

100 ms

(11 + b)mm 3 mm

(6 + b - c) mm

(L + d) mm

Thermal pressure motor

Scanning startstandby position

Standby position

Feed

Shading compensation

End

FB scanning operation 1

START key ONSTART key ON

Feed

Read/write signal

Write pulse motor

Image scanner ADF shadingsensor

Flat bed read pulse motor

Lamp

TPH pressure sensorON

OFF

Page 167: RN Technical Manual

11 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE SCANNER UNIT

Removal and Assembly

1. Removing the Scanner Unit

(1) Move the carriage to the locking position using test mode No. 154 (scanner lock action), open theScanner table [I], secure the mirror carriage using the Transport lock screw [J], and then close again.

(2) Switch off the power, and remove the rear cover.

(3) Remove the Scanner unit cover (left) [B] by removing the four screws (M4 x 8). (If the ADF unit is fitted,remove the Original receiving tray bracket [C] with the two (M4 x 10) screws and two (M4 x 8) screws,and then remove the Scanner unit cover (left) [B] before disconnecting the ADF wire harnessconnector and ground lead.)

(4) Remove the Stage cover [A] by removing the two screws (M4 x 8), and detach the ground lead. (If theADF unit is fitted, turn the ADF mount plate on the rear of the hinge 180 degrees to lock it (seephotograph below), and then remove the ADF unit with the two screws (M4 x 10).)

(5) Remove the Scanner unit cover (rear) [D] by removing the three screws (M4 x 8).

(6) Remove the Scanner unit cover (front) [K] by removing the two upper screws (M4 x 8), and then openthe Scanner table [I] and removing the side screw (M4 x 6).

(7) Remove the Scanner unit cover (right) [E] by removing the two screws (M4 x 8).

(8) Detach the two connectors from the Scanner unit [H]. (Flat cables on main PCB connectors)

(9) Remove the two screws (M4 x 8) on the two Stage cover brackets [G] that secure the Scanner unit [H].

(10) Remove the Stage cover sensor assembly [F] with the screw (M4 x 8).

(11) Remove the six screws (M4 x 8) on the Scanner unit [H], and remove the unit upwards. (Take carewhen handling, as this is a heavy precision unit.)

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• When mounting the scanner, align the half-pierced sections of the two front alignment brackets andthose on the two Stage cover brackets [G].

• After reassembling, open the scanner table and remove the transport lock screw on the mirrorcarriage. Clear the error message using test mode No. 155 (Scan release action).

* If the scanner locking mode is not cleared using the test mode after reassembling, error message“T23-111” will be displayed.

L

* When ADF is fitted (hinge rear)

Position whenremoving the ADF unit

Page 168: RN Technical Manual

11 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION

A

BCD

E

FG

H

I

J

K

REMOVING THE SCANNER UNIT

A: Stage cover

B: Scanner unit cover (left)

C: Original receiving tray bracket

D: Scanner unit cover (rear)

E: Scanner unit cover (right)

F: Stage cover sensor ass’y

G: Stage cover bracket

H: Scanner unit

I: Scanner table

J: Transport lock screw

K: Scanner unit cover (front)

L: ADF mount plate

When ADF is fitted

Page 169: RN Technical Manual

11 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE STAGE GLASS

2. Removing the Stage Glass

(1) Switch off the power.

(2) Remove the scanner unit cover (left) [A] by removing four screws (M4 x 8). (If the ADF unit is fitted,remove the original receiving tray bracket by removing the two (M4 x 10) screws and two (M4 x 8)screws, and then remove the scanner unit cover (left).)

(3) Remove the Original stopper [B] by removing two Special step screws [D], and slide to the left (paperfeed side) slightly before lifting up and removing.

(4) Lift up the left-hand side (paper feed side) of the Stage glass [C] slightly, and slide it out towards thepaper feed side.

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Push the stage glass firmly against the right-hand side (ejection side) after placing it on the scannerunit frame.

A: Scanner unit cover (left)

B: Original stopper

C: Stage glass

D: Special step screw

A

B

C D

Page 170: RN Technical Manual

11 – 17RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION

REMOVING THE FLAT BED ORIGINAL DETECTION SENSOR

3. Removing the Flat Bed Original Detection Sensor

(1) Switch off the power.

(2) Remove the Stage glass [A]. (Refer to this section for details.)

(3) Unplug the connector, and remove the flat bed original detection sensor [B] by removing one screw(M3 x 8).

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Engage the hooks on the bottom of the Flat bed original detection sensor into the holes in thebracket.

A: Stage glass

B: Flat bed original detection sensor

A

B

Page 171: RN Technical Manual

11 – 18RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE LAMP

4. Removing the Lamp

(1) Switch off the power.

(2) Remove the scanner unit cover (left) by removing four screws (M4 x 8). (If the ADF unit is fitted,remove the original receiving tray bracket by removing two (M4 x 10) screws and two (M4 x 8) screws,and then remove the scanner unit cover (left).)

(3) Remove the Original stopper by removing the two special step screws, and slide it to the left (paperfeed side) slightly before lifting it up and removing it.

(4) Remove the Stage glass bracket [A] by removing two special screws (M3).

(5) Push the Lamp carriage [B] by hand (taking care not to touch optical components) and move it to thecutaway [C] in the scanner unit frame. Perform the following procedures on the cutaway section onthe operation panel side of the scanner unit.

(6) Remove the Stopper [D], which holds the lead wire, by removing the screw (M3 x 6).

(7) Remove the wire harness connector [E] of the Lamp.

(8) Remove the Lamps [G].

a) To remove the Lamp on the right-hand side (paper ejection side)of the lamp carriage

Remove the Lamp bracket (with screw hole) [F] by removing screw (M3 x 4), and then removethe Lamp [G] by pulling it towards the front.

b) To remove the Lamp on the left-hand side (paper feed side) of the lamp carriage

Push the stopper on the Lamp bracket [H] to the right (ejection side) to unlock, and remove itupwards. Remove the Lamp [G] by pulling it towards the front.

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• The bracket and lamp engage with each other. First engage the lamp on the rear bracket, and thenengage it on the front bracket, which was detached, before finally securing the lamp.

• Mount the Stopper [D] while pressing down the lead wire.

• Secure the Stage glass bracket [A] by engaging it positively with the half-pierced sections on bothsides.

G

H

Engage

Page 172: RN Technical Manual

11 – 19RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION

REMOVING THE LAMP

A: Glass stage bracket

B: Lamp carriage

C: Cutaway

D: Stopper

E: Connectors

F: Lamp bracket (with screw hole)

G: Lamps

H: Lamp bracket

A

BC

DE

FG

Page 173: RN Technical Manual

11 – 20RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE LENS ASS’Y

5. Removing the Lens Ass’y

(1) Switch off the power.

(2) Remove the stage glass. (Refer to this section for details.)

(3) Remove the Lens cover [A] and the three screws (M3 x 6).

(4) Remove the three washer screws (M3 x 6), detach the ground wire and connector, and then removethe Lens ass’y [B].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Align the two half-pierced sections [C] on the front of the lens ass’y.

• Do not loosen any screws other than those specified.

• Do not touch the lens or other optical components.

Page 174: RN Technical Manual

11 – 21RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION

REMOVING THE LENS ASS’Y

A: Lens cover

B: Lens ass’y

C: Half-pierce

A

B

C

Loosen these screws.

Page 175: RN Technical Manual

11 – 22RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

FLAT BED READ PULSE MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment

1. Flat Bed Read Pulse Motor Speed Adjustment

Before making this adjustment, first adjust the image elongation and shrinkage by adjusting the Writepulse motor speed (see chapter 13).

Checks and procedure(1) Place B4 size papers on the paper feed tray, place Test chart No. 15 on the stage glass, and

make a master.

(2) Lay the print on top of the test chart original to check that the image elongation and shrinkage ofthe print is within ±1.4% at the 310-mm line of the test chart original.

(3) If the elongation or shrinkage is more than the specified range, adjust using test mode No. 182(flat-bed scanning image elongation and shrinkage adjustment).

Page 176: RN Technical Manual

11 – 23RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SCTION

FB SCAN START POSITION ADJUSTMENT

2. FB Scan Start Position Adjustment

Checks and procedure(1) Place a scale face down on the stage glass, pressing the front edge flush against original

stopper, and then close the stage cover.

(2) Select photograph mode, make a master, and then print. Check that the scanning start positionis at 5 mm ± 2 mm on the scale (top 5 mm ± 2 mm is erased).

(3) If the scanning start position is out of the specified range, adjust using test mode No. 181 (flatbed scanning start position adjustment).

Stage glass

Scale

Original stopper

Page 177: RN Technical Manual

11 – 24RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 11. FB ORIGINAL SCANNING SECTION

FB HORIZONTAL SCAN POSITION ADJUSTMENT

3. FB Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment

Checks and procedure(1) Place B4 size papers on the paper feed tray, place Test chart No. 15 on the stage glass, and

make a master.

(2) Inspect the master made on the print drum, and check that pattern “e” is not omitted on both theleft and right of the image on the master.

(3) If the pattern is omitted, adjust using test mode No. 180 (Flat bed horizontal scan positionadjustment).

Page 178: RN Technical Manual

12 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12: ADF SCANNING SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... 12-2

1. ADF Original Set Mechanism ................................................................................ 12-2

2. ADF Original Scanning Mechanism (with Automatic Base Control) ..................... 12-6

3. ADF Original Scanning Mechanism ...................................................................... 12-8

Removal and Assembly .................................................................................................... 12-11

1. Removing the Original Scraper Ass’y ..................................................................12-11

2. Removing the Pickup Roller ................................................................................ 12-13

3. Removing the Original Stripper Roller ................................................................ 12-14

4. Removing the ADF Original Detection, Original IN, and OriginalOUT Sensors ....................................................................................................... 12-15

5. Removing the ADF Original Registration Sensor ............................................... 12-16

6. Removing the ADF Read Pulse Motor ................................................................. 12-17

7. Removing the Registration Roller, Original Read Roller,and Original Ejection Roller (top) ........................................................................ 12-19

Adjustment ........................................................................................................................ 12-22

1. ADF Scan Start Position Adjustment ................................................................... 12-22

2. ADF Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment .......................................................... 12-23

3. ADF Read Pulse Motor Speed Adjustment(Image Elongation & Shrinkage Adjustment) ..................................................... 12-24

4. Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ........................................................... 12-25

5. ADF Image Skew Adjustment .............................................................................. 12-26

Page 179: RN Technical Manual

12 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF ORIGINAL SET MECHANISM

Mechanism

1. ADF Original Set Mechanism

When the original is set along the original guide fence and pushed up against the Original stopper gate[C], the ADF original detection sensor [A] is activated (light path open) and the Master/Print indicator on thepanel switches to “Master”. The thermal pressure motor operates to lower the thermal head until the TPHpressure sensor is activated.

After a preset interval, the ADF read pulse motor [O] reverses to lower the Pickup roller [B] in the directionshown by the arrows and withdraw the Original stopper gate [C] upwards. (The one-way clutchincorporated between the Registration roller gear [N] and registration roller shaft prevents theRegistration roller [G] from rotating here.)

Once the Pickup roller [B] descends to push against the original, the Pickup roller [B] and Original stripperroller [D] rotate in the original transport direction, and a single original is fed forward by the action of theOriginal stripper roller [D] and Original stripper pad [E]. This activates the ADF original registration sensor[F] (light path blocked) and the edge of the original is stopped by the Stationary registration roller [G].Once a preset interval has elapsed from when the ADF original registration sensor [F] was activated, theADF read pulse motor [O] operates in the forward direction. This raises the Pickup roller [B] and at thesame time rotating the Registration roller [G], Original read roller [I], and Original ejection roller (top) [J],which are all linked by the Timing belt [M], in the feed direction.

The original stops briefly after it has been moved 100 mm from the original set position.

A BCD

E

F

G

H

IJ

K

Originalfeed

Page 180: RN Technical Manual

12 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF ORIGINAL SET MECHANISM

A: ADF original detection sensor

B: Pickup roller

C: Original stopper gate

D: Original stripper roller

E: Original stripper pad

F: ADF registration sensor

G: Registration roller

H: Registration driven roller

I: Original read roller

J: Original ejection Roller (top)

K: Original pickup pad

L: Original guide fence

M: Timing belt

N: Registration roller gear

O: ADF read pulse motor

A BC

F

GI

J

L

M

NO

Page 181: RN Technical Manual

12 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF ORIGINAL SET MECHANISM

(1) “A10-107” is displayed if the ADF original registration sensor is not activated (light path blocked) evenwhen the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 182 mm after the feeding in process begins.

ADF original detection sensor

1.5 S 815 ms 50 ms(1)

Forward

Reverse

Press

Light path open

To scanningoperation

Set original

OFF

ON

ADF original registration sensor

ADF read pulse motor

TPH pressure sensor

Thermal pressure motor

Page 182: RN Technical Manual

12 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF ORIGINAL SET MECHANISM

[Memo]

Page 183: RN Technical Manual

12 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM (WITH AUTOMATIC BASE CONTROL)

2. ADF Original Scanning Mechanism (with Automatic Base Con-trol)

(This operation only occurs when the original scanning density is set to “Auto”.)

Once the ADF original setting operation is complete, pressing the START key illuminates the lamp.

The Flat bed read pulse motor is activated immediately, moving the Lamp carriage in the feed direction tothe shading position. Shading adjustment is performed before moving back in the return direction andstopping at the ABC scanning position (3 + b) mm in front of the normal ADF scanning position.

The ADF read pulse motor meanwhile operates in the forward direction, rotating the Registration roller,Master lead roller, and Original ejection roller (top) in the feed direction. The original is fed forward 26.9mm and stops after the Original IN sensor activates (light path blocked), and the intensity of the originalbackground color is scanned by the image sensor in this position. The FB read pulse motor then movesthe Lamp carriage back (3 + b) mm in the return direction. (Normal ADF original scanning position)

The ADF read pulse motor immediately operates in the forward direction, and at the same time, the read/write signal activates, causing scanning of the original to start.

The read/write signal is deactivated a preset interval after the Original IN sensor is deactivated (light pathopen) when the original is moved away (or immediately if the Write pulse motor has rotated the equivalentof the paper size as previously specified by the user settings). The ADF read pulse motor then operatesat high speed as soon as scanning is complete.

Once the original is transported a preset distance after the Original OUT sensor deactivates, the ADF readpulse motor stops and the ADF original scanning operation is complete.

The Automatic Base Control function does not operate in Photo, Line/Photo, or Dot modes.

Page 184: RN Technical Manual

12 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM (WITH AUTOMATIC BASE CONTROL)

(1) “A10-108” is displayed if the Original IN sensor is not activated (light path blocked) even when theADF read pulse motor transports the original 138 mm after the START key is pressed.

(2) “A10-109” is displayed if the Original OUT sensor is not activated (light path blocked) even when theADF read pulse motor transports the original 117 mm after the Original IN sensor activates (light pathblocked).

(3) “A10-105” is displayed if the Original IN sensor is not deactivated (light path open). This occurs evenif the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 114 mm after the ADF original registration sensorhas deactivated (light path open).

(4) “A10-106” is displayed if the Original OUT sensor is not deactivated (light path open). This occurseven if the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 117 mm after the Original IN sensor isdeactivated (light path open).

* L = paper size specified in user settings (mm)Adjustment value a = Test mode No. 183 (ADF scanning mirror position adjustment)Adjustment value b = Test mode No. 184 (ADF-ABC mirror position adjustment)

41 mm

100 ms

100 ms8 mm(7 + a - b) mm

83.4 mm

26.9 mm

100 ms (3 + b) mm

Lamp

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

START key ON

Return

Feed

Shading adjustment

Highspeed

Forward

End

Forward

Image scanner ADFshading sensor

Flat bed read pulse motor

Original OUT sensor

Read/write signal

Original IN sensor

ADF original registrationsensor

ADF read pulse motor

Page 185: RN Technical Manual

12 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

Note: ABC stands for Automatic Base Control.

3. ADF Original Scanning Mechanism

Once the ADF original setting operation is complete, pressing the START key illuminates the lamp.

The Flat bed read pulse motor immediately activates, moving the Lamp carriage in the feed direction tothe shading position. Shading adjustment is performed before moving back in the return direction andstopping at the normal ADF scanning position.

The ADF read pulse motor [M] meanwhile operates in the forward direction, rotating the Registration roller[A], Original read roller [C], and Original ejection roller (top) [J] in the feed direction. The original is fedforward 29.9 mm after the Original IN sensor [E] activates (light path blocked), activating the read/writesignal and initiating a scan of the original. (The pickup roller returns to the standby position.)

The read/write signal is deactivated a preset interval after the Original IN sensor [E] is deactivated (lightpath open) when the original is moved away (or immediately if the Write pulse motor has rotated theequivalent of the paper size as previously specified in the user settings). The ADF read pulse motor [M]then operates at high speed as soon as scanning is complete.

Once the original is transported a preset distance after the Original OUT sensor [I] deactivates, the ADFread pulse motor [M] stops. This completes the ADF original scanning operation.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

Originalfeed

Page 186: RN Technical Manual

12 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

AC

IKL

M

A: Registration roller

B: Registration driven roller

C: Original read roller

D: Original read driven roller

E: Original IN sensor

F: Reflecting plate

G: Shading plate

H: ADF stage glass

I: Original OUT sensor

J: Original ejection roller (top)

K: Original ejection roller (bottom)

L: Original receiving tray

M: ADF read pulse motor

Page 187: RN Technical Manual

12 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF ORIGINAL SCANNING MECHANISM

(1) “A10-108” is displayed if the Original IN sensor is not activated (light path blocked) even when theADF read pulse motor transports the original 138 mm after the START key is pressed.

(2) “A10-109” is displayed if the Original OUT sensor is not activated (light path blocked). This occurseven when the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 117 mm after the Original IN sensor isactivated (light path blocked).

(3) “A10-105” is displayed if the Original IN sensor is not deactivated (light path open). This occurs evenif the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 114 mm after the ADF original registration sensoris deactivated (light path open).

(4) “A10-106” is displayed if the Original OUT sensor is not deactivated (light path open). This occurseven if the ADF read pulse motor transports the original 117 mm after the Original IN sensor isdeactivated (light path open).

* L = paper size specified in user settings (mm)Adjustment value a = Test mode No. 183 (ADF scanning mirror position adjustment)

Lamp

41 mm

100 ms

100 ms8 mm(10 + a) mm

29.9 mm

83.4 mm

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

ReturnFeed

Shading adjustment

Highspeed

Forward

EndSTART key ON

Image scanner ADF shadingsensor

Flat bed read pulse motor

Original OUT sensor

Read/write signal

Original IN sensor

ADF originalregistration sensor

ADF read pulse motor

Page 188: RN Technical Manual

12 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE ORIGINAL SCRAPER ASS’Y

Removal and Assembly

1. Removing the Original Scraper Ass’y

(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove theADF cover [A]. Finally, close the ADF unit.

(2) Remove the plastic lock rings [C] from both sides of the Original scraper ass’y [B], and then removethe bearing bushes [D]. Lift up the Original stopper gate [E] to remove the Original scraper ass’y.

A

Page 189: RN Technical Manual

12 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE ORIGINAL SCRAPER ASS’Y

A: ADF cover

B: Original Scraper Ass’y

C: Lock ring

D: Bearing bush

E: Original stopper gate

B

CC

DD

E

Page 190: RN Technical Manual

12 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE PICKUP ROLLER

2. Removing the Pickup Roller

(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove theADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.

(2) Pull apart both ends of the Pickup roller frame ass’y [B] holding the Pickup roller [A], and remove thePickup roller [A]. (Take care not to drop the washer on the right-hand side gear of the Pickup roller.)

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Do not forget to insert the washer on the right-hand side gear on the Pickup roller.

A: Pickup roller

B: Pickup roller frame ass’y

AB B

Page 191: RN Technical Manual

12 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE ORIGINAL STRIPPER ROLLER

3. Removing the Original Stripper Roller

(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove theADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.

(2) Remove the Original Scraper Ass’y. (See this chapter.)

(3) Remove the Pickup roller, (see this chapter.) and then remove the Intermediate guide [A].

(4) Remove the plastic Lock ring [C] on the left-hand side of the Original stripper roller [B], move theOriginal stripper roller [B] to the left, and then remove the right-hand E-ring [D]. Move the Pickup rollerframe ass’y (right) [E] to the left, pull out the Pin [F] and then remove it to the right. (Take care not todrop the washer fitted to the gear side of the Original stripper roller.)

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Fit the gear on the right-hand side as shown in the photograph, as the Original scraper rollercontains a one-way clutch. Also, do not forget to insert the washer on the gear side.

• When engaging the pin into the Pickup roller frame ass’y (right), insert it into the shallower slot.

A: Intermediate guide

B: Original stripper roller

C: Lock ring

D: E-ring

E: Pickup roller frame ass’y (right)

F: Pin

G: ADF timing belt

A

B

C D E F

G

Page 192: RN Technical Manual

12 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE ADF ORIGINAL DETECTION, ORIGINAL IN, AND ORIGINAL OUT SENSORS

4. Removing the ADF Original Detection, Original IN, and OriginalOUT Sensors

(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and removethe ADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.

Removing the ADF Original Detection Sensor

(2) Remove the connector, free the actuator by hand, and release the clips on the ADF originaldetection sensor [A] to remove it.

Removing the Original IN Sensor

(2) Remove the connector, remove the screw (M3 x 10), and then remove the Original IN sensor [B].

* After removing it, turn variable resistor VR1 on top of the ADF-PCB [C] to readjust LED1 tomaximum brightness.

Removing the Original OUT Sensor

(2) Remove the connector, free the actuator by hand, and release the clips on the Original OUTsensor [D] to remove it.

A: ADF original detection sensor

B: Original IN sensor

C: ADF-PCB

D: Original OUT sensor

A B

CD

Page 193: RN Technical Manual

12 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE ADF ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR

5. Removing the ADF Original Registration Sensor

(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove theADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.

(2) Remove the connector, lift up the actuator and move it to the left end, and release the clips on theADF original registration sensor [A] to remove it.

A: ADF original registration sensor

A

Page 194: RN Technical Manual

12 – 17RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE ADF READ PULSE MOTOR

6. Removing the ADF Read Pulse Motor

(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and remove theADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.

(2) Detach connectors CN1 and CN3 on the ADF-PCB [A], and remove the ground screw [C] on the ADFupper guide ass’y [B] together with the other screws (M3 x 6). (Take care not to drop the rosettewasher fitted beneath the ground screw.)

(3) Remove the ADF upper guide ass’y [B] and four screws (M3 x 6).

(4) Remove the ADF read pulse motor [D] and two screws (M3 x 6).

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• When mounting the ADF upper guide ass’y, engage the two aligning pins.

• When attaching the ground screw, do not forget to insert the rosette washer.

• After mounting the ADF upper guide ass’y, readjust the Original IN sensor. Turn variable resistorVR1 on top of the ADF-PCB to readjust LED1 to maximum brightness.

A

B

CD E

Page 195: RN Technical Manual

12 – 18RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE ADF READ PULSE MOTOR

A: ADF-PCB

B: ADF upper guide ass’y

C: Ground screw

D: ADF read pulse motor

E: Original IN sensor

B

D

D

Page 196: RN Technical Manual

12 – 19RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE REGISTRATION ROLLER, ORIGINAL READ ROLLER, AND ORIGINAL EJECTION ROLLER (TOP)

7. Removing the Registration Roller, Original Read Roller, andOriginal Ejection Roller (top)

(1) Switch off the power and open the ADF unit. Now remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and removethe ADF cover. Finally, close the ADF unit.

(2) Detach connectors CN1 and CN3 on the ADF-PCB, and remove the ground screw on the ADFupper guide ass’y and screws (M3 x 6). (Take care not to drop the rosette washer fitted beneaththe ground screw.)

(3) Remove the ADF upper guide ass’y [A] and four screws (M3 x 10).

(4) Lift up the Jam release dial [B] towards the top left to pull it out.

(5) Remove the Idler spring [G], loosen the two screws on the Idler [F], and then loosen the tensionon the ADF timing belt [H].

(6) Remove the three screws (M3 x 10) from both the ADF guide frame (front) [I] and ADF guide frame(rear) [J], and then remove the frames.

Removing the Registration Roller

(7) Remove the front E-ring [P], rear E-ring [M], washer [K], thrust spring [L], and washer [K] (takecare, as the washer and thrust spring may fly out when the E-ring is removed). Next, pull out theTiming gear [Q], which is protrudes onto the front flat face, and then remove the Registration roller[C].

Removing the Original Read Roller

(7) Remove the front clutch spring [O], E-ring [P], rear E-ring [M], washer [K], thrust spring [L], andwasher [K] (take care, as the washer and thrust spring may fly out when the E-ring is removed).Next, pull out the Timing gear [Q], which protrudes onto the front flat face, and then remove theOriginal read roller [D].

Removing the Original Ejection Roller (top)

(7) Remove the front E-ring [P], rear E-ring [M], washer [K], thrust spring [L], and washer [K] (takecare, as the washer and thrust spring may fly out when the E-ring is removed). Next, pull out theTiming gear [Q], which protrudes onto the front flat face, and then remove the Original EjectionRoller (top) [E].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Insert the thrust spring at the rear of each roller, placing washers on either side, and securing theassembly with the E-ring.

• Note the insertion direction of the lugs on each timing gear.

• Attach the ADF timing belt as shown in the photograph.

• Engage the three pins in each case when securing the ADF guide frame (front) and ADF guideframe (rear). Also check that the bearing bushes are fitted correctly on each roller.

• After attaching the idler spring, the ADF timing belt tension is adjusted by loosening the two idlerscrews.

Page 197: RN Technical Manual

12 – 20RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

REMOVING THE REGISTRATION ROLLER, ORIGINAL READ ROLLER, AND ORIGINAL EJECTION ROLLER (TOP)

A: ADF upper guide ass’y

B: Jam release dial

C: Registration roller

D: Original read roller

E: Original Ejection Roller (top)

F: Idler

G: Idler spring

H: ADF timing belt

I: ADF guide frame (front)

J: ADF guide frame (rear)

A

B

C

D

E

IJ

FrontRear

F

G

H

Page 198: RN Technical Manual

12 – 21RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

Front Rear

REMOVING THE REGISTRATION ROLLER, ORIGINAL READ ROLLER, AND ORIGINAL EJECTION ROLLER (TOP)

K: Washer

L: Thrust spring

M: E-ring

N: Bearing bush

O: Clutch spring

P: E-ring

Q: Timing gear

Registration roller

Original read roller

Original ejection roller (top)

KLK

M

N

N

P Q

N

KLK

M

N

O

P Q

KLK

M

N

N

P Q

Page 199: RN Technical Manual

12 – 22RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF SCAN START POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment

1. ADF Scan Start Position Adjustment

Checks and procedure(1) Make a master with the ADF unit using an original with no blank margin at the top, and print.

(2) Examine the prints to check that the scanning start position is at 5 mm ± 2 mm from the top of theoriginal.

(3) If the position is outside the specified parameters, adjust using test mode No. 186 (ADFscanning start position adjustment).

Page 200: RN Technical Manual

12 – 23RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF HORIZONTAL SCAN POSITION ADJUSTMENT

2. ADF Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment

Checks and procedure(1) Place a sheet of B4 size paper on the paper feed tray, and make a master of test chart No. 15

using the ADF unit.

(2) Examine the master created on the print drum, and check that pattern “e” on the left and right ofthe original is not missing.

(3) If the pattern is missing, adjust using test mode No. 185 (ADF main scanning left/rightadjustment).

Page 201: RN Technical Manual

12 – 24RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF READ PULSE MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT (IMAGE ELONGATION & SHRINKAGE ADJUSTMENT)

3. ADF Read Pulse Motor Speed Adjustment (Image Elongation &Shrinkage Adjustment)

Before adjusting, first adjust the image elongation and shrinkage using the Write pulse motor speedadjustment (See chapter 13.)

Checks and procedure(1) Place a sheet of B4 size paper on the paper feed tray, and make a master of test chart No. 15

using the ADF unit.

(2) Lay the print on top of the original to check that the image elongation and shrinkage is within±1.4% at the 310-mm line.

(3) If the elongation and shrinkage is outside the specified parameters, adjust using test mode No.187 (ADF scanning Image Elongation & Shrinkage Adjustment).

Page 202: RN Technical Manual

12 – 25RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ORIGINAL IN SENSOR SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT

4. Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment

Procedure(1) Open the ADF unit, remove the two screws (M3 x 10), and then remove the ADF cover. Finally,

close the ADF unit.

(2) Turn variable resistor VR1 on top of the ADF-PCB to adjust LED1 to maximum brightness.

Checks after adjustment• Check that LED1 on top of the ADF-PCB clears when the original (thin Riso paper inlet) is detected

by the Original IN sensor.

Page 203: RN Technical Manual

12 – 26RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 12. ADF SCANNING SECTION

ADF IMAGE SKEW ADJUSTMENT

A: ADF mount plate

B: Nut

C: ADF slide screw

Figure 1

T

A

B

C

X X

Bottom Top

Figure 2

5. ADF Image Skew Adjustment

Checks and procedure(1) Place a sheet of B4 size paper on the paper feed tray, and make a master of test chart No. 15

using the ADF unit.

(2) Lay the print on top of the original with the 310-mm lines at the side parallel, and check that theskew (X) of the leading 160-mm line is within 2 mm.

(3) If the skew is outside the specified parameters, adjust as follows.

• Remove the screw (M4 x 6) on the ADF mount plate [A], rotate through 180° to open the ADF unitto 90°, and then loosen the two ADF unit retaining screws (M4 x 10).

• Loosen the nut [B] on the hinge assembly (right), and turn the ADF slide screw [C] (clockwise ifas in Figure 2, and counter-clockwise if as in Figure 1) to adjust dimension T. Turning the screwclockwise increases dimension T.

• Tighten the two ADF unit retaining screws, and then tighten the nuts with the ADF slide screwsecured.

• Make a master and print, and repeat the procedure from the beginning if the skew is still outsidethe specified parameters.

Page 204: RN Technical Manual

13 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13: MASTER MAKING SECTION

Contents

Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... 13-2

1. Master making & master loading .......................................................................... 13-2

2. Scanner Table Set Detection Mechanism ............................................................. 13-4

3. Master Cutting Mechanism .................................................................................... 13-5

4. Thermal Print Head Elevation Mechanism ........................................................... 13-6

5. Master Positioning Mechanism ............................................................................. 13-8

6. Master Making ........................................................................................................ 13-9

Removal and Assembly .................................................................................................... 13-11

1. Removing the Write Roller ....................................................................................13-11

2. Removing the Load Roller (bottom) .................................................................... 13-12

3. Removing the Cutter Unit .................................................................................... 13-14

4. Removing the Load Roller ................................................................................... 13-15

5. Removing the Thermal Print Head ...................................................................... 13-16

6. Removing the Master Loading Unit ..................................................................... 13-17

7. Removing the Thermal Pressure Motor .............................................................. 13-18

Adjustment ........................................................................................................................ 13-19

1. Thermal power of thermal print head .................................................................. 13-19

2. Master Feeding Adjustments .............................................................................. 13-20

Page 205: RN Technical Manual

13 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

MASTER MAKING & MASTER LOADING

Mechanism

1. Master making & master loading

The master making & master loading mechanism is made up of the following components.

1) Scanner Table Set Detection Mechanism

The Flat bed set switch [A] confirms that the original is positioned on the scanner table.

The Master loading unit sensor [B] confirms that the master loading unit is set.

The Master end sensor [C] confirms that master roll has ran out of master.

2) Master Cutting Mechanism

The master cutting operation is performed by the Cutter motor [D], and the cutter motor stop positionis confirmed by the Cutter home position switch [E].

3) Thermal Print Head Elevation Mechanism

The Thermal print head (TPH) [F] is raised and lowered by the Thermal pressure motor [G], and theposition is confirmed by the TPH pressure sensor [H].

4) Master Making Section Mechanism

Master making is performed by lowering the Thermal print head [F] and transporting the masterclamped between it and the Write roller [I]. The master is transported by the Write roller, which isdriven by the Write pulse motor [J]. Created masters are stored inside the master stocker [K].

5) Master Loading Mechanism

Masters that have been created are fed to the print drum and clamped, and then loaded by rotatingthe print drum.

The master is transported by the Load roller [M], which is driven by the Load pulse motor [L].

Page 206: RN Technical Manual

13 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

MASTER MAKING & MASTER LOADING

A: Flat bed set switch

B: Master loading unit sensor

C: Master end sensor

D: Cutter motor

E: Cutter home position switch

F: Thermal print head

G: Thermal pressure motor

H: TPH pressure sensor

I: Write roller

J: Write pulse motor

K: Master stocker

L: Load pulse motor

M: Load roller

N: Master detection sensor

O: Master positioning sensor

B

C

A

D

F

E

H

G

J

I

L

K

M

O

N

Page 207: RN Technical Manual

13 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

SCANNER TABLE SET DETECTION MECHANISM

2. Scanner Table Set Detection Mechanism

Scanner table and master loading set detection mechanism

The Flat bed set switch [A] confirms that the scanner table is closed.

The Flat bed set switch [A] is the interlocking switch for the main motor, and this forces the Main motor,Clamp motor, and TPH power to an emergency stop if the Scanner table is opened while the system isoperating.

The Master loading unit switch [B] confirms that the Master loading unit is set, and the master settingoperation is performed once the Master loading unit is set.

Master end detection

The end of the master roll is confirmed by the Master end sensor [C] detecting the black end markattached to the end of the master on the master roll.

The Master end sensor [C] checks every 10 ms while the master is being transported, and gives anindication on the panel when the end mark is detected twice in succession.

A: Flat bed set switch

B: Master loading unit switch

C: Master end sensor

B

A

C

Page 208: RN Technical Manual

13 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

MASTER CUTTING MECHANISM

3. Master Cutting Mechanism

• The master is cut by the upper cutter of the Cutter unit being moved up and down by the Cutter motor [A].

• The Cutter motor rotates in a constant direction, and the Cutter home position switch [B] confirms theposition of the upper cutter.

• The Cutter is at the home position when it is not pressing against the Cutter home position switch [B],and if the switch is depressed briefly after the Cutter motor starts, the motor stops when the switch is nolonger depressed.

A: Cutter motor

B: Cutter home position switch

B

A

Cutter unit home position

Page 209: RN Technical Manual

13 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

THERMAL PRINT HEAD ELEVATION MECHANISM

4. Thermal Print Head Elevation Mechanism

Thermal print head elevation

When the system is on standby or when winding the master onto the print drum after master making,the Thermal print head is raised from the Write roller. Conversely, for master making and duringtransport, the Thermal print head is lowered and pressed onto the Write roller.

The Thermal print head is raised and lowered by the Pressure release cam [B], which is driven by theThermal pressure motor [A].

The Pressure release cam [B] is an eccentric cam, which raises and lowers the TPH pivot plate [C] asit rotates. The raised and lowered stop positions for the motor are detected by the TPH pressuresensor [E], which is blocked by the Pressure detection disc [D]. The Sliding plate [F] and Blade link [G]are also moved by the vertical action of the thermal head.

Thermal print head raised position

In the Thermal print head raised position, the Load roller No. 1 (top) [H] and Load roller (top) [I] alsorise.

At the same time, the Blade cushion [J] descends, and applies back tension to the master while it isbeing wound onto the print drum to prevent creases in the master.

Thermal print head’s lowered position

In the Thermal print head lowered position, the Load roller No. 1 (top) [H] and Load roller (top) [I] alsodescend to allow the master to be transported. At the same time, the Blade cushion [J] rises.

Initialization

This moves the Thermal print head to the pressure release (raised) position when power is switchedon, or when everything is reset.

Loading guide plate operation

• In the clamp plate master release operation at the start of master ejection, the front edge of theLoading guide plate is raised by the Master release bar to prevent it from obstructing the leadingedge of the freed master on the drum.

• In the clamp plate master clamping operation at the start of master loading, only the front edgesheet of the Loading guide plate is raised by the Clamp plate, so as to prevent it from obstructingthe master loading operation.

• During master loading, the master being loaded is back-tensioned by the sponge fitted to thebottom of the front edge sheet of the Loading guide plate.

Page 210: RN Technical Manual

13 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

THERMAL PRINT HEAD ELEVATION MECHANISM

A: Thermal pressure motor

B: Pressure release cam

C: TPH pivot plate

D: Pressure detection disc

E: TPH pressure sensor

F: Sliding plate

G: Blade link

B

C

A D

FE HG

J

I

K

H: Load roller No. 1 (top)

I: Load roller (top)

J: Blade cushion

K: Loading guide plate

Page 211: RN Technical Manual

13 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

MASTER POSITIONING MECHANISM

5. Master Positioning Mechanism

The master positioning operation is performed to bring the master to the Master positioning sensor whenopening or closing the Master loading unit or during master making.

For master roll replacement

(1) • Insert the leading edge of the new master roll to the Master stopper gate [A], and close the masterloading unit.

• Closing the Master loading unit raises the Master stopper gate.

• The Master loading unit switch monitors operations every 10 ms and determines that the Masterloading unit is closed when the light path is blocked twice in succession. The master is thenchecked by the Master detection sensor [B].

(2) • The Thermal print head is lowered by the Thermal pressure motor, and the Write pulse motor andLoad pulse motor operate to transport the master to the Master positioning sensor [C].

(3) • Once the light path to the Master positioning sensor [C] is blocked by the master, the Write pulsemotor alone operates in reverse to return the master 2 mm. The motor then stops and theThermal print head is raised.

For master cutting

Steps (2) to (3) above are performed following master cutting.

A: Master stopper gate

B: Master detection sensor

C: Master positioning sensor

B

A

C

Page 212: RN Technical Manual

13 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

MASTER MAKING

6. Master Making

The sequence of operations from master making to master mounting is as described below.

(1) At the start of master making, the Thermalprint head is lowered to clamp the masterbetween it and the Write roller.

(2) The write pulse motor and Load pulsemotor operate to transport the master tothe Master positioning sensor, where itwaits for scanning system preparations tobe completed.

(3) Once master making can be started, theWrite pulse motor operates to transport themaster to the writing start position beforemaster making commences. The mastercreated is then stored in the masterstocker.

(4) Once the master making in step (3) starts,the Load pulse motor operates to transportthe leading edge of the master to theclamp plate, where it is clamped.

(5) Once master making is finished, theThermal print head is raised, and the printdrum rotates as the master is wound ontoit.

Page 213: RN Technical Manual

13 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

MASTER MAKING

(6) The print drum pauses at the 220°position, where the master is cut.

(8) The master setting operation is performed.

(7) After the print drum has rotated a further15°, the Master positioning sensorconfirms that the master has been cut.Cutting has been performed correctly if thelight path to the sensor is blocked (nomaster).If the light path to the sensor is open, it isdetermined that an error has occurred.In this case, the cutting operation isrepeated, the Master positioning sensorconfirms whether the master has been cutafter the print drum has rotated a further15°. If it is cut, “A03 Cutting error” isdisplayed, and if it is not cut, “T13 Cuttermotor lock” is displayed.

Page 214: RN Technical Manual

13 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

REMOVING THE WRITE ROLLER

Rmoval and Assembly

1. Removing the Write Roller

(1) Switch off the power, and remove the rear cover.

(2) Loosen the mounting bracket screws (M4 x 8: 2 pcs) on the Write pulse motor [B], and remove theBelt [C].

(3) Remove the Pulley [D]. (M2 x 6: 1 pc)

(4) Remove the Bearing stopper [E] and pull out the bearing. (M4 x 6: 1 pc)

(5) Pull out the Write roller [A].

[Precautions on Reassembly]

• Take care not to drop the bearing when mounting the Write roller (particularly the front).

A: Write roller

B: Write pulse motor

C: Belt

D: Pulley

E: Bearing stopper

B

D

A

C

E

Page 215: RN Technical Manual

13 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

REMOVING THE LOAD ROLLER (BOTTOM)

2. Removing the Load Roller (bottom)

(1) Switch off the power, and remove the rear cover.

(2) Loosen the screw (M4 x 8: 1 pc) on the Tension assembly [B], loosen the mounting bracket screws(M4 x 8: 2 pcs) on the Load pulse motor [C], and then remove the belt.

(3) Remove the Pulley [D]. (M2 x 6: 1 pc)

(4) Remove the Bearing fixing plate [E] and pull out the bearing. (M4 x 8: 1 pc)

* Removing the rear bearing here simplifies subsequent disassembly or reassembly work.

A: Load roller (bottom)

B: Tension assembly

C: Load pulse motor

D: Pulley

E: Bearing fixing plate

B

C

A

E

D

Page 216: RN Technical Manual

13 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

REMOVING THE LOAD ROLLER (BOTTOM)

(5) Remove the master roll, and remove the Master cover [F]. (M4 x 6: 1 pc)

(6) Remove the Master holders [G] on both sides. (M3 x 6: 2 pcs each)

(7) Remove the Master set guide [H]. (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)

(8) Unplug the rear connector, and remove the Stocker cover [I]. (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)

(9) Remove the springs on both sides, and then remove the Master guide [J].

(10) Remove the Load roller guide [K] (M4 x 8: 2 pcs), and then remove the Load roller (bottom).

I: Stocker cover

J: Master guide

K: Load roller guide

I

J

K

F: Master cover

G: Master holder

H: Master set guide

F

G H

Page 217: RN Technical Manual

13 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

REMOVING THE CUTTER UNIT

3. Removing the Cutter Unit

(1) Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and pull out the print drum.

(2) Unplug the rear connector, and remove the Cutter cover [A]. (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)

A: Cutter cover

B: Load guide (tip)

C: Cutter guide plate

D: Tension assembly

E: Cutter unit connector

F: Belt

(3) Remove the Cutter guide plate [C]. (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)

(4) Remove the cutter unit mounting screws. (2 pcs)

(5) Loosen the Tension assembly [D] screw, detach the Belt [F], unplug the cutter unit connector [E], andthen remove the Cutter unit.

A

B

C

E

D

F

Page 218: RN Technical Manual

13 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

REMOVING THE LOAD ROLLER

4. Removing the Load Roller

(1) Perform steps (1) to (4) to remove the cutter unit.

(2) Remove the Loading guide (bottom) [E]. (M4 x 8: 2 pcs)

(3) Loosen the screw (M4 x 8: 1 pc) on the Tension assembly [A], and remove the Belt [F].

(4) Remove the Pulley [B] (M2 x 6: 1 pc) and Bearing fixing plate [C] (M4 x 8: 1 pc).

(5) Remove the Load roller [D].

A: Tension assembly

B: Pulley

C: Bearing fixing plate

D: Load roller

E: Loading guide (bottom)

F: Belt

A B

C

D

E

F

Page 219: RN Technical Manual

13 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

REMOVING THE THERMAL PRINT HEAD

5. Removing the Thermal Print Head

(1) Lift up the Master loading unit, and remove the Master loading unit bottom cover [A]. (Screws onlyneed be loosened.)

(2) Remove the mounting screws on the TPH bracket [B]. (M3 x 6: 2 pcs)

(3) Remove the ground lead mounting screw. (M3 x 6: 1 pc)

(4) Unplug the two connectors, and remove the Thermal print head together with the TPH bracket.

A: Master loading unit bottom cover

B: TPH bracket

A

B

Page 220: RN Technical Manual

13 – 17RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

REMOVING THE MASTER LOADING UNIT

6. Removing the Master Loading Unit

(1) Move the Scanner table unit to the servicing position [A].

(2) Remove the Master loading unit upper cover [D]. (M3 x 6: 4 pcs)

(3) Remove the wire harness and ground wire [C], and place them on the Master loading unit.

(4) Open the Master disposal gate housing [B] as wide as possible. (Secure with a piece of cord orsomething similar.)

(5) With the Master loading unit opened as wide as possible, unhook the Springs [E] on both sides.

(6) Lift up the Master loading unit and remove.

A: Servicing position

B: Master disposal gate housing

C: Wire harness and ground lead

D: Master loading unit upper cover

E: Spring (on both sides)

E

A

D

B

C

Page 221: RN Technical Manual

13 – 18RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

REMOVING THE THERMAL PRESSURE MOTOR

7. Removing the Thermal Pressure Motor

(1) Remove the Master loading unit.

(2) Remove the E-rings and bearings, and then remove the Load roller No. 1 (top) [A].

(3) Remove the De-electricity brush plate [B]. (M3 x 6: 2 pcs)

(4) Remove the Thermal pressure motor [C] as a unit. (M3 x 6: 4 pcs)

A: Load roller No. 1 (top)

B: De-electricity brush plate

C: Thermal pressure motor

AB

C

Page 222: RN Technical Manual

13 – 19RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

THERMAL POWER OF THERMAL PRINT HEAD

Adjustment

1. Thermal power of thermal print head

The thermal power must always be set before making masters after the Thermal print head has beenreplaced.

Procedure

(1) Switch off the power to the system.

(2) Connect a multimeter across pin 1 (+) and pin 3 (-) of CN108 on the Power supply unit.

(3) Run test mode No. 238. (Switch the thermal print head voltage on/off using the START/STOPkeys.)

(4) Check that the voltage reading on the voltmeter corresponds to the thermal print headresistances shown in the setting table.

(5) If different, adjust using VR301 (coarse adjustment) and VR302 (fine adjustment) on the Powersupply unit.

Precautions During Setting

• Adjustments must be made after the Thermal print head has been installed.

• A voltage will not be applied across the Thermal print head unless the Scanner table is positionedand test mode No. 238 is run.

Setting tableThermal print head resistance (Ohm) Voltage (V)

1403--1413 15.9

1414--1431 16.0

1432--1449 16.1

1450--1467 16.2

1468--1485 16.3

1486--1503 16.4

1504--1522 16.5

1523--1540 16.6

1541--1559 16.7

1560--1577 16.8

1578--1596 16.9

1597--1615 17.0

1616--1634 17.1

1635--1653 17.2

1654--1672 17.3

1673--1692 17.4

1693--1711 17.5

1712--1731 17.6

1732--1750 17.7

1751--1770 17.8

1771--1790 17.9

1791--1810 18.0

1811--1830 18.1

1831--1850 18.2

1851--1871 18.3

1872--1891 18.4

1892--1898 18.5

Page 223: RN Technical Manual

13 – 20RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

MASTER FEEDING ADJUSTMENTS

2. Master Feeding Adjustments

1) Master cut position adjustmentThis adjustment sets the master cutting timing (print drum stop position for cutting).

Checks and procedure

(1) Adjust if the tail end of the master mounted on the print drum is either too long or too short.

(2) Run test mode No. 284 to adjust.Setting range: -100 to +100 (-10.0° to +10.0°)Setting units: 1 (0.1°)Default: 0 (±0°)

Increasing the settings increases the length of each master.

2) Master clamp range adjustmentAdjust the master clamp range when it is mounted.

Checks and procedure

(1) Make a normal and confidential master, and thencheck the length of the master protruding from theClamp magnet plate.If the amount protruding is within 2 mm ±2 mm, it isnormal. If it is outside this range, adjust as shownbelow.

(2) Run test mode No. 283 and adjust.Setting range: -100 to +100 (-10.0 mm to +10.0mm)Setting units: 1 (0.1 mm)Default: 0 (±0 mm)Increasing the settings increases the amount ofprotrusion.

Note:The relative positioning of already-made masters wound onto the print drum will change if theclamp range is adjusted. The master scanning start position must therefore be readjusted, and itmust also be confirmed that the Vertical printing position adjustment is correct.

3) Master making image elongation/shrinkage adjustmentAdjust the Write pulse motor speed for master making.

Checks and procedure

(1) Run test mode No. 051 Test print (mesh), andproduce an actual print.Printing is correct if the length of three blockshorizontally is the same as that for four blocksvertically. (Check by folding paper and illuminatingfrom behind.) If it is not correct, adjust as shownbelow.

(2) Run test mode No. 287 and adjust.Setting range: -50 to +50 (-5.0% to +5.0%)Setting units: 1 (0.1%)Default: 0 (±0%)Increasing the settings elongates the image.

Note:The vertical printing position must be readjusted afteradjusting the elongation/shrinkage.

Clamp magnet plate

Master

2 ± 2m m

Page 224: RN Technical Manual

13 – 21RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 13. MASTER MAKING SECTION

MASTER FEEDING ADJUSTMENTS

4) Write start position adjustment

Adjust the write start position (distance from master positioning sensor ON to read/write signalON).

Adjustment for a leading edge margin of 5 mm assuming that the master clamp range has beencorrectly adjusted.

Checks and procedure

(1) Run test mode No. 050 Test print (check pattern), to confirm that the master clamp range iscorrectly adjusted.

(2) Cover the print drum surface, aligning the leading edge of the paper with the print drum supportmarks on either side as shown in the diagram, and then transfer the ink to the paper by rubbingfrom above.The position is correct if the leading edge margin is 5 mm. If it is not correct, adjust as shownbelow.

(3) Run test mode No. 281 and adjust.Setting range: -30 to + 50 (-3.0 mm to +5.0 mm)Setting units: 1 (0.1 mm)Default: 0 (±0 mm)

Increasing the settings lowers the write start position and increases the size of the paperleading-edge margin, moving the printing area downward.

5) Master making length adjustment

Adjust the master making area (scanning length)

Adjustment for a bottom edge margin of 2 mm assumingthat the master clamp range has been correctly adjusted.

Checks and procedure

(1) Run test mode No. 050 Test print (Check pattern),remove the master created from the print drum, andmeasure the length.The master is correct if the length is 357 mm. If it isnot correct, adjust as shown below.

(2) Run test mode No. 282 and adjust.Setting range: -100 to +100 (-10.0 mm to +10.0 mm)Setting units: 1 (0.1 mm)Default: 0 (±0 mm)

Increasing the settings increases the length of themaster making area.

製版面

Master

Master making area 357 mm

Clamp platePaper

Print drum supports on both sides

Printing area

Paper

Mark5 mm

Printing area

Page 225: RN Technical Manual

14 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14: TIMING CHARTS

Contents

Initialization Operations ..................................................................................................... 14-2

1. Overall Initialization Operation ............................................................................... 14-2

2. Individual Initialization Operations ......................................................................... 14-2

[Thermal Print Head Initialization Operation] ........................................................ 14-2[Master Compression Plate Initialization Operation] ............................................ 14-3[Clamp Unit Home Positioning Operation] ........................................................... 14-3[Vertical Printing Position Initialization Operation] ................................................. 14-4[Pressure Initialization Operation] ......................................................................... 14-4

Printing Operations ............................................................................................................ 14-5

1. Normal Overall Printing Operation ........................................................................ 14-5

2. Individual Printing Operations ............................................................................... 14-6

[Print Start Operation] ............................................................................................. 14-6[Print In Progress - End Operation] ....................................................................... 14-8[Three-Cycle No-Paper Pickup Operation] ............................................................ 14-9

3. Elevator Operations ............................................................................................. 14-10

[Elevator Raise Operation] ................................................................................... 14-10[Elevator Lower Operation] ................................................................................... 14-11[Elevator Servo Operation] ................................................................................... 14-12

4. Print Drum Peripheral Operations ....................................................................... 14-13

[Clamp Release] .................................................................................................. 14-13[Master Clamp Operation] ................................................................................... 14-13[Inking Operation (No Ink Detection)] .................................................................. 14-14[Inking Operation (Overflow Detection)] ............................................................... 14-14[Print Drum Solenoid Lock Release] ................................................................... 14-15

5. Print Adjustment Operations ............................................................................... 14-16

[Print Speed Change] .......................................................................................... 14-16[Print Intensity Change] ........................................................................................ 14-16[Vertical Print Positioning Operation] ................................................................... 14-17

Master Removal Operations ............................................................................................ 14-18

1. Overall Timing for Normal Master Creation ........................................................ 14-18

2. Individual Master Removal Operations ............................................................... 14-19

[Removed Master Vertical Transport Operation] ................................................. 14-19[Disposed Master Compressing Operation] ....................................................... 14-20

Master Making Operation ................................................................................................ 14-21

1. Overall Timing for Normal Master Creation ........................................................ 14-21

2. Individual Master Making Operation .................................................................... 14-22

[Thermal Print Head Compression Operation] ................................................... 14-22[Thermal Print Head Release Operation] ........................................................... 14-22[Master Positioning Operation] ............................................................................ 14-23[Master Cutting Operation] ................................................................................... 14-24[Master Making Operation] ................................................................................... 14-25

Page 226: RN Technical Manual

14 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

OVERALL INITIALIZATION OPERATION

Initialization Operations

1. Overall Initialization Operation

Returns the following items to their home positions when the power is switched on or when everything isreset.

2. Individual Initialization Operations

[Thermal Print Head Initialization Operation]

Thermal print head

Master compression plate

Clamp unit

Vertical printing position

Pressure control

Initialization start Initialization end

Vertical/horizontal printing position notinitialized if clamping error occurs.

(1) The TPH pressure sensor is checked on starting, and the operation starts from Start 1 if it is ON, andfrom Start 2 if it is OFF. At Start 1, the thermal pressure motor operates in the compressing directionuntil the TPH pressure sensor goes OFF.

(2) A time-out occurs at 250 ms here, and error message [T19-207] is displayed.

(3) The thermal pressure motor operates in the release direction until the TPH pressure sensor goesON.A time-out occurs at 1 s here, and error message [T19-208] is displayed.

(4) Initialization ends once the TPH pressure sensor goes ON.

Start1 Start2

OFF: Start2–

Max 1 s (Error: 208)

100 ms

Max 250 ms (Error: 207)

TPH pressuresensor

Thermalpressuremotor

Compress

OFF

Release

Start End

End

(1)

(2)

(3)

ON

OFF

When ON: TPH pressure sensor: Blocked

Page 227: RN Technical Manual

14 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL INITIALIZATION OPERATIONS

[Master Compression Plate Initialization Operation]

(1) The master compression sensor is checked on starting, and the operation starts from Start 1 if it isON, and from Start 2 if it is OFF. At Start 1, the master compression motor operates in thecompressing direction until the master compression sensor goes OFF.A time-out occurs at 400 ms here, and the process moves to Start 2.

(2) The master compression motor operates in the return direction until the master compression sensorgoes ON.A time-out occurs at 7 s here, and error message [T12-305] is displayed.

(3) Initialization ends once the master compression sensor goes ON and the master compression motorstops.

Max 400 msSTART2

100 ms

100 ms

Max 7 s(Error: 305)

Max 840 ms100 ms

Master removalsensor

(1)

(2)

(3)

Start End

Master compre-ssion sensor

Disposal boxfull sensor

Masterremoval motor

ON

OFF

Mastercompressionmotor

Compress

OFF

Return

Start1 Start2

To returnprocess

ON

OFFON

OFF

ON

OFF

When ON: Master removal sensor: Open, Master compression sensor: Open, Disposal box full sensor:Open

[Clamp Unit Home Positioning Operation]

(1) On starting, the system checks that clamp sensor A and clamp sensor B are both OFF. If either isON, clamp initialization is performed.If the clamp sensors do not change even after the clamp motor operates, a time-out occurs at 3 s,and the error message [T03-501] is displayed.

(2) Initialization ends once both clamp sensor A and clamp sensor B are OFF.

(3) A time-out occurs at 13 s if both the sensors do not go OFF after the clamp motor operates, and errormessage [T03-502] is displayed.

320 ms 100 ms

Clamp sensor A

Clamp sensor B

Clamp motor(3) Max 13 s

(Error: 502)

(1) Max 3 s

(Error: 501)

Start (1) End (2)

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Forward

OFF

Reverse

When ON: Clamp sensor A: Blocked, Clamp sensor B: Blocked

Page 228: RN Technical Manual

14 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL INITIALIZATION OPERATIONS

[Vertical Printing Position Initialization Operation]

(1) The print pressure control sensor is checked on starting, and the operation starts from Start 1 if it isOFF, and from Start 2 if it is ON. At Start 1, the pressure control motor operates in the direction ofcompression until the print pressure control sensor goes ON.A time-out occurs at 12 mm here, and error message [T11-600] is displayed.

(2) The pressure control motor operates in the release direction until the print pressure control sensorgoes OFF.A time-out occurs at 12 mm here, and error message [T11-601] is displayed.

(3) The pressure control motor operates in the direction of compression once again, and then moves theequivalent of B mm after the print pressure control sensor goes ON, before stopping. (B = 0.25 mm +value set in Test mode No. 682)

(1) The vertical centering sensor is checked on starting, and the operation starts from Start 1 if it is OFF,and from Start 2 if it is ON. At Start 1, the print positioning pulse motor operates in the upwarddirection until the vertical centering sensor goes ON.A time-out occurs at 18 mm here, and error message [T05-603] is displayed.

(2) The print positioning pulse motor operates in the downward direction until the vertical centeringsensor goes OFF.A time-out occurs at 18 mm here, and error message [T05-604] is displayed.

(3) The print positioning pulse motor operates in the upward direction once again, and then moves theequivalent of A mm after the vertical centering sensor goes ON, before stopping. (A = 0.25 mm +value set in Test mode No. 680)

[Pressure Initialization Operation]

When ON: Vertical centering sensor: Blocked

100 ms 100 ms

ON: Start2–

A mm

Max 18 mm(Error: 603)

Max 18 mm (Error: 604)

HOLD

Start1 Start2

Start End

Verticalcenteringsensor

Printpositioningpulse motor

ON

OFF

UpOFFDown

(1)

(2) (3)

When ON: Print pressure control sensor: Blocked

100 ms 100 ms

ON: Start2–

B mm

Max 5.4 kg (6 s)(Error: 600)

Max 5.4 kg (6 s) (Error: 601)

HOLD

Start1 Start2

Start End

Print pressurecontrol sensor

Pressurecontrol motor

ONOFF

Compress

OFF

Release

(1)

(2) (3)

Page 229: RN Technical Manual

14 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

NORMAL OVERALL PRINTING OPERATION

Printing Operations

1. Normal Overall Printing Operation

Elevator

Print drum

Print start

Vertical printingposition

Print pressurechange

Print in progress

Ink

Pressurerelease

Servo operation

Inking, overflow detection

Reset

Master check

Adjustment due to speed/temperature variations and intensity adjustment

Vertical adjustment

Page 230: RN Technical Manual

14 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL PRINTING OPERATIONS

2. Individual Printing Operations

[Print Start Operation]

Paperdetection atpress section

Position Asensor

Paper sensor

Paperreceivingsensor

PaperdetectionsensorPaper ejectionmotor overloadcurrent

Main motor

Paper feedclutch

Pressuresolenoid

Paper ejectionmotor

Suction fan

Separation fan

Copy countsignal

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Print start

To printing-in-progressprocess

Print drumangle

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Paperdetected

No paper

0° 0°180°

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(2)

(3)

40° A°

(4)

(4)

(5)

B° C°

(6)

(7)

When ON: Position A sensor: Blocked, Paper sensor: Blocked, Paper receiving sensor: Open, Paper detectionsensor: Open

(1)

(1)

Page 231: RN Technical Manual

14 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL PRINTING OPERATIONS

(1) The paper receiving sensor is checked on starting printing, and error message [A09-417] isdisplayed if it is ON (paper jam from start).The paper sensor is checked on starting printing, and error message [A07-418] is displayed if it isON (paper jam from start).On starting printing, the main motor, paper ejection motor, suction fan, and separation fan areswitched ON.The print drum initially rotates at speed 1 here, and increments by one speed level at the drum angleof 220° for each sheet printed.

(2) The paper ejection motor overload current is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals, and errormessage [T02-401] is given if is activated three times in succession.

(3) The pressure solenoid is activated at the drum angle of 40°, and subsequently remains ON untilprinting ends.

(4) The paper detection sensor is checked at the drum angle of A°, and the paper feed clutch is activatedif paper is present.Error message [C04-402] is displayed if no paper is present.

(A = 62° + value set in Test mode 481)

(5) The paper is transported, and the paper feed clutch is deactivated once the print drum has rotated B°from when the paper is detected by the paper sensor.

(B = 21° + value set in Test modes 482–485 + adjustment for print drum speed)

(6) If the paper sensor does not detect the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to angle C, itdetermines that no paper has been picked up, and moves to the three-cycle no-paper pickupoperation.

(C = 135° + value set in Test mode 486 + value set in Test mode 481)

(7) If the paper receiving sensor does not detect the paper by the time the print drum has rotated toangle D, it determines that a paper jam has occurred, and moves to the print-end operation.The paper sensor is checked at 180° before the print drum stops, error message [A07-409] isdisplayed if paper is present, and [A08-410] is displayed if there is no paper.

(D = 350° + value set in Test mode 487)

Page 232: RN Technical Manual

14 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL PRINTING OPERATIONS

[Print In Progress - End Operation]

(4) The paper detection sensor is checked at the drum angle, A, and the paper feed clutch is activated ifpaper is present.Error message [C04-402] is displayed if no paper is present. (A = 62° + value set in Test mode 481)

(5) The paper is transported, and the paper feed clutch is deactivated once the print drum has rotated B°from when the paper is detected by the paper sensor. (B = 21° + value set in Test modes 482–485 +adjustment for print drum speed)

(6) If the paper sensor does not detect the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to angle C, itdetermines that no paper has been picked up, and moves to the three-cycle no-paper pickupoperation. (C = 135° + value set in Test mode 486 + value set in Test mode 481)

(7) If the paper receiving sensor does not detect the paper by the time the print drum has rotated toangle D, it determines that a paper jam has occurred, and moves to the print-end operation.The paper sensor is checked at 180° before the print drum stops, error message [A07-409] isdisplayed if paper is present, and [A08-410] is displayed if there is no paper. (D = 350° + value set inTest mode 487)

(8) If the paper does not pass beyond the paper sensor by the time the print drum has rotated to 100°, itdetermines that a paper jam has occurred, and moves to the print-end operation. Error message[A07-413] is displayed.

(9) The paper receiving sensor is checked at the drum angle, E. If the paper is still present, itdetermines that a paper jam has occurred, moves to the print-end operation, and error message[A09-411] is displayed. If normal, the copy count is incremented. (E = 250° + value set in Test mode488)

(10) On completion of printing, the pressure solenoid is deactivated when the print drum has rotated to angleC.

(11) On the final revolution, the drum rotates at speed 1 at 20°, reducing to 30 rpm at 180° and 10 rpm at270°. The main motor, paper receiving motor, suction fan, and separation fan stop once the printdrum is detected at position A.

Paper detection atpress section

Position A sensor

Paper sensor

Paper receivingsensor

Paper detectionsensor

Main motor

Paper feedclutch

Pressure solenoid

Paper ejectionmotor

Suction fan

Separation fan

Copy count signal ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Print drum angle

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Paperdetected

No paper

0° A°

(6)

(7)

0° 0° 0°

(4)

(5)

(8)

100° E°

(9)

(8)

100° E°

(9)

(10)

20°180°

270°

(7)

Page 233: RN Technical Manual

14 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL PRINTING OPERATIONS

[Three-Cycle No-Paper Pickup Operation]

(1) If the paper sensor does not detect the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to angle C, itdetermines that no paper has been picked up, and moves to the three-cycle no-paper pickupoperation.(C = 135° + value set in Test mode 486 + value set in Test mode 481)

(2) The paper feed operation is performed a second time, and returns to the normal operation if thepaper sensor detects the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to angle C.

(3) The paper feed operation is performed a third time, and returns to the normal operation if the papersensor detects the paper by the time the print drum has rotated to angle C. If paper is not detected, itmoves to the print-end operation, and error message [A07-412] is displayed.

Paper sensor

PaperreceivingsensorPaperdetectionsensor

Main motor

Paper feedclutch

Pressuresolenoid

Paperejectionmotor

Suction fan

Separationfan

Copy countsignal ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Print drum angle

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Paperdetected

No paper

0° 0° 0° 0°C°

(1)

C° C°

(2) (3)

Paperdetection atpress section

Position Asensor

Page 234: RN Technical Manual

14 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

ELEVATOR OPERATIONS

3. Elevator Operations

[Elevator Raise Operation]

(1) The operation ends if the upper limit sensor is ON from the start.If the upper limit sensor is OFF, the elevator operates until the upper limit sensor goes ON.

(2) Error message [T02-400] is displayed if both the upper and lower limit sensors are ON at the start.

(3) The elevator motor overload current is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator isoperating, and error message [T02-401] is displayed if an overload current is detected three times insuccession.

(4) The paper detection sensor is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator isoperating, and error message [C04-402] is displayed if no paper is detected twice in succession.

(5) The paper feed tray safety switch is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator isoperating, and error message [A06-403] is displayed if it is detected as OFF twice in succession.

(6) If the lower limit sensor takes more than 2 s to go OFF after the elevator starts, a time-out occurs,and error message [T02-404] is displayed.

(7) If the upper limit sensor takes more than 12 s to go ON after the elevator starts, a time-out occurs,and error message [T02-405] is displayed.

When ON: Upper limit sensor: Blocked, Lower limit sensor: Blocked, Paper detection sensor: Open

Max 12 s (Error: 405)

Max 2 s(Error: 404)

100 ms100 ms 100 ms

Upper limitsensor

Lower limitsensor

Elevator motoroverload current

Paper detectionsensor

Paper feed traysafety switch

Elevator motor Raise

OFF

Lower

Start End

(2) Upper/lower limit sensors both ON (Error: 400)

(1)

(3) ON three times in succession (Error: 401)

(4) ON twice in succession (Error: 402)

(5) ON twice in succession (Error: 403)

(6)

(7)

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Page 235: RN Technical Manual

14 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

ELEVATOR OPERATIONS

[Elevator Lower Operation]

(1) The operation ends if the lower limit sensor is ON from the start.If the lower limit sensor is OFF, the elevator operates until the lower limit sensor goes ON.

(2) The elevator motor overload current is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator isoperating, and error message [T02-401] is displayed if an overload current is detected three times insuccession.

(3) The paper feed tray safety switch is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator isoperating, and error message [A06-403] is displayed if it is detected as OFF twice in succession.

(4) If the upper limit sensor takes more than 2 s to go OFF after the elevator starts, a time-out occurs,and error message [T02-406] is displayed.

(5) If the lower limit sensor takes more than 12 s to go ON after the elevator starts, a time-out occurs,and error message [T02-407] is displayed.

When ON: Upper limit sensor: Blocked, Lower limit sensor: Blocked, Paper feed tray safety switch: Notdepressed

Max 12 s (Error: 407)

Max 2 s (Error: 406)

100 ms100 ms 100 ms

Start End

Upper limitsensor

Lower limitsensor

Elevator motoroverload current

Paper feed traysafety switch

Elevator motor

(1)

(2) ON three times in succession (Error: 401)

(3) OFF twice in succession (Error: 403)

(4)(5)

Raise

OFF

Lower

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Page 236: RN Technical Manual

14 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

ELEVATOR OPERATIONS

[Elevator Servo Operation]

(1) The operation ends if the upper limit sensor is ON from the start.If the upper limit sensor is OFF, the elevator operates until the upper limit sensor goes ON.

(2) The elevator motor overload current is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator isoperating, and error message [T02-401] is displayed if an overload current is detected three times insuccession.

(3) The paper detection sensor is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator isoperating, and error message [C04-402] is displayed if no paper is detected twice in succession.

(4) The paper feed tray safety switch is continually monitored at 100 ms intervals while the elevator isoperating, and error message [A06-403] is displayed if it is detected as OFF twice in succession.

(5) If the upper limit sensor goes ON, the elevator briefly descends until the upper limit sensor goesOFF.

(6) The elevator then rises until the upper limit sensor goes ON again.

(7) The elevator servo operation is subsequently performed.

(8) If the upper limit sensor remains OFF for more than 2 s during the elevator servo operation, errormessage [T02-408] is displayed.

100 ms100 ms 100 ms

100ms

100ms

Upper limitsensor

Lower limitsensor

Elevator motoroverload current

Paper detectionsensor

Elevator motor

Paper feed traysafety switch

At start of printing Elevator servo

Controlled by H/W

(2) ON three times in succession (Error: 401)

(3) ON twice in succession (Error: 402)

(4) ON twice in succession (Error: 403)

(6)

(1)

(5)

(8) OFF more than 2 s insuccession (Error: 408)

Raise

OFF

Lower

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

When ON: Upper limit sensor: Blocked, Lower limit sensor: Blocked, Paper detection sensor: Open,Paper feed tray safety switch: Depressed

Page 237: RN Technical Manual

14 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

PRINT DRUM PERIPHERAL OPERATIONS

4. Print Drum Peripheral Operations

[Clamp Release]

(1) The clamp motor operates in the forward direction on starting.

(2) When clamp sensor B goes OFF with clamp sensor A ON, the clamp motor operates for a further 280ms before stopping.A time-out occurs at 5 s after the clamp motor starts, and error message [T03-504] is displayed.

(3) A time-out occurs and error message [T03-503] is displayed if clamp sensor B does not go ONwithin 3 s of the clamp motor starting.

[Master Clamp Operation]

(1) The clamp motor operates in the forward direction on starting.

(2) When clamp sensor A goes OFF with clamp sensor B ON, the clamp motor operates for a further 250ms before stopping.A time-out occurs at 5 s after the clamp motor starts, and error message [T03-506] is displayed.

(3) A time-out occurs and error message [T03-505] is displayed if clamp sensor B does not go ON with3 s of the clamp motor starting.

When ON: Clamp sensor A: Blocked, Clamp sensor B: Blocked

Max 5 s (Error: 504)

280 msMax 3 s (Error: 503)

100 ms

Clamp sensor A ON

OFF

Clamp sensor B ON

OFF

Clamp motor Forward

OFF

Reverse

(1)

(2)

(3)

Max 5 s (Error: 506)

250 msMax 3 s (Error: 505)

100 ms(1)

(2)

(3)

Clamp sensorA

ON

OFF

Clamp sensor B ON

OFF

Clamp motor Forward

OFF

Reverse

Page 238: RN Technical Manual

14 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

PRINT DRUM PERIPHERAL OPERATIONS

[Inking Operation (No Ink Detection)]

(1) Inking is performed with the main motor ON.

(2) The ink sensor is monitored at 500 ms intervals, and if it is detected as OFF, the inking motor isactivated until the ink sensor goes ON. A time-out occurs at A s here, and the ink cartridge isdetermined as empty. Error message [C01-512] is displayed.

Normally: (A = Value set in Test mode No. 583 (initially 20 s))After ink replacement: (A = Value set in Test mode No. 584 (initially 40 s))

[Inking Operation (Overflow Detection)]

(1) The overflow sensor is monitored at 10 ms intervals, and if it is detected as ON, the inking motor isstopped for period (2) irrespective of the ink sensor status.

(2) If the overflow sensor is detected as ON B times in succession, an overflow is determined to haveoccurred, and error message [T04-513] is displayed.(B = Value set in Test mode No. 585 (initially 50 times))

10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms10 ms

Position A sensor ON

OFF

Overflow sensor ON

OFF

Main motor ON

OFF

Inking motor ON

OFF

(2) ON for B times in succession(Error: 515)

(1)

500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms500 ms

Position A sensor ON

OFF

Ink sensor ON

OFF

Main motor ON

OFF

Inking motor ON

OFF

(2) OFF for A s in succession (Error: 514)

(1)

Page 239: RN Technical Manual

14 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

PRINT DRUM PERIPHERAL OPERATIONS

(1) The print drum set sensor and print drum release switch are monitored at 100 ms intervals.

(2) If the print drum release switch is detected as having been depressed twice in succession, theposition A sensor is checked, and the print drum rotates to position A if the position A sensor is OFF.(The print drum release switch LED blinks here.)

(3) The print drum lock solenoid and print drum release switch LED are switched ON until the print drumset sensor goes OFF (until the print drum is removed) to allow the print drum to be removed atposition A.

(4) If the print drum is left at the removal position without being removed, a time-out occurs at 30 s, andthe print drum lock solenoid and print drum release switch LED are switched OFF.

[Print Drum Solenoid Lock Release]

Max 30 s

100 ms 100 ms 100 ms

100 ms 100 ms 100 ms

Position A sensor ON

OFF

Print drum set sensor ON

OFF

Print drum locksolenoid

Print drum releaseswitch

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Print drum releaseswitch LED

ON

OFF

(1)

(2)

(1)

(3)

(3) (4)

Page 240: RN Technical Manual

14 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

PRINT ADJUSTMENT OPERATIONS

5. Print Adjustment Operations

[Print Speed Change]

(1) If the print speed adjustment key is pressed, the speed does not change immediately, but rather atthe next time the print drum reaches the 220° position.

(2) If the print speed adjustment key is pressed twice, the speed only changes by one level perrevolution, and so two revolutions are required to reach the specified speed.

[Print Intensity Change]

(1) If the print intensity adjustment key is pressed, the print intensity does not change immediately, butrather at the next time the print drum reaches the 150° position.

(2) Likewise, when the print intensity adjustment key is pressed twice, the intensity changes asspecified the next time the print drum reaches the 150° position.

150° 150° 150° 150° 150°

Position Asensor

ON

OFF

Print intensityadjustmentkey

UP

OFF

DOWN

Pressurecontrol motor

Increase

OFF

Decrease

(1) (2)

220° 220° 220° 220° 220°

speed 3 speed 4 speed 3 speed 2 speed 3

Position Asensor

ON

OFF

Print speedadjustment key

UP

OFF

DOWN (1) (2)

Page 241: RN Technical Manual

14 – 17RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

PRINT ADJUSTMENT OPERATIONS

[Vertical Print Positioning Operation]

(1) If the print position adjustment key is pressed once (within 1 s), the position is immediately changed0.5 mm.

(2) If the print position adjustment key is pressed twice (within 1 s), the second press is ignored ifpressed while the position is being moved for the first press.

(3) If the print position adjustment key is pressed for more than 1 s, the position is moved 5 mm for thefirst 1 s pressed, and then continuously in 5 mm increments for as long as the key is pressed.

0.5 mm

Within 1 s Within 1 s (Operation ignored)

0.5 mm0.5 mm 0.5 mm 0.5 mm

1 s

Print positionadjustment key

ON

OFF

Print positioningpulse motor

ON

OFF

Page 242: RN Technical Manual

14 – 18RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

OVERALL TIMING FOR NORMAL MASTER CREATION

Master Removal Operations

1. Overall Timing for Normal Master Creation

Image scanning

Master making

Master loading

Master setting

Thermal print head

Master cutting

Removed master verticaltransport

Master compressing

Paper feed tray elevator

Clamp

Print drum

Print pressure change

Proof-read print

Pressure release

Start End

Compress Release Compress Release

Release Position Aadjustment

Homeposition reset

Master checkOnly when master on print drum isunconfirmed

Only position A adjustment if no master on printdrum

Page 243: RN Technical Manual

14 – 19RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL MASTER REMOVAL OPERATIONS

2. Individual Master Removal Operations

[Removed Master Vertical Transport Operation]

The removed master vertical transport operation starts after the print drum clamp plate releasingoperation ends.

(1) The master compression sensor is checked on starting, and the master compression plate isinitialized if it is OFF.

(2) The master removal motor overload current is monitored continually at 100 ms intervals during theRemoved master vertical transport operation, and error message [T12-300] is displayed if anoverload current is detected three times in succession.

(3) The main motor and master removal motor are operated to vertically transport the removed masterwhile rotating the print drum.The print drum speed here corresponds to the value set in Test mode No. 387 (initially 15 rpm).

(4) The progress of the removed master is checked twice by the master removal sensor at print drumangles a° and b°, and is judged to be normal if the sensor is ON at both points. If it is OFF at onepoint, error message [A04-303] is displayed.

(a = value set in Test mode No. 380 (initially 70°))(b = value set in Test mode No. 381 (initially 90°))

(5) The print drum stops at position A, and the master removal motor stops after d ms. The masterremoval sensor is checked here, and error message [A04-304] is displayed if it is ON.

(d = value set in Test mode No. 382 (initially 0 s))

When ON: Position A sensor: Blocked, Master removal sensor: Open, Master compression sensor: Open

d ms

OFF-OFF (Error: 303)

ON(Error: 304)

0° 0°a° 180° 320°

10 rpmc rpm

100 ms100 ms 100 ms

AMaster removalsensorMastercompressionsensor

Main motorON

OFF

Master removalmotor

ON

OFF

Master removalmotor overloadcurrent

ON

OFF

Position Asensor

ON

OFF

Print drum angle

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

ON

OFFON

OFF

Page 244: RN Technical Manual

14 – 20RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL MASTER REMOVAL OPERATIONS

[Disposed Master Compressing Operation]

The disposed master compressing operation starts after the removed master vertical transport operationends.

(1) The master compression sensor is checked on starting, and the master compression plate isinitialized if it is OFF.

(2) The master compression motor operates to start the master compression.

(3) The master compression sensor goes OFF. A time-out occurs here at 400 ms, and error message[T12-306] is displayed.

(4) The disposal box full sensor goes ON midway.

(5) The master compression motor stops once the master compression sensor goes back ON again.A time-out occurs at 11 s after the start of master compression here, and error message [T12-307] isdisplayed.Similarly, if (4) is not detected, the disposal box is judged to be full, and error message [C03-313] isdisplayed.

(6) The master compression motor reverses f s after the motor stops.(f = value set in Test mode No. 384 (initially 1 s))

The master compression sensor goes OFF while the master compression motor operates inreverse.A time-out occurs here at 3 s after reversing, and error message [T12-309] is displayed.

(7) The master compression motor stops once the master compression sensor goes back ON.A time-out occurs here at 7 s after reversing, and error message [Error 305] is displayed.

When ON: Master removal sensor: Open, Master compression sensor: Open, Disposal box full sensor:Open

Max 11 s (Error: 307)Max 7 s (Error: 305)

Max 400 ms(Error: 306)

f sec

Brake

100 ms

Brake

100 mse ms

Max 3 s(Error: 309)

Masterremovalsensor

Start End

MastercompressionsensorDisposal boxfull sensor

Masterremovalmotor

ON

OFF

Mastercompressionmotor

Compress

OFF

Release

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

(1)

Page 245: RN Technical Manual

14 – 21RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

OVERALL TIMING FOR NORMAL MASTER CREATION

Master Making Operation

1. Overall Timing for Normal Master Creation

Image scanning

Master making

Master loading

Master setting

Thermal print head

Master cutting

Removed master verticaltransport

Master compressing

Paper feed tray elevator

Clamp

Print drum

Print pressure change

Proof-read print

Pressure release

Start End

Compress Release Compress Release

ReleasePosition Aadjustment

Homepositionreset

Master check

Page 246: RN Technical Manual

14 – 22RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL MASTER MAKING OPERATION

2. Individual Master Making Operation

[Thermal Print Head Compression Operation]

(1) The thermal pressure motor operates in the direction of compression.

(2) The TPH pressure sensor goes OFF, and the thermal pressure motor stops when the sensor goesback ON again.A time-out occurs at 250 ms when the TPH pressure sensor goes OFF, and error message [T19-207] is displayed. Likewise, a time-out occurs at 1 s when the TPH pressure sensor goes back onagain, and error message [Error 208] is displayed.

[Thermal Print Head Release Operation]

Max 1 s (Error: 210)

Brake

100 msMax 250 ms(Error: 207)

Start End

TPH pressuresensor

Thermalpressure motor

ON

OFF

Release

OFF

Compress

(2)

(1)

When ON: TPH pressure sensor: Blocked

(1) The thermal pressure motor operates in the release direction.

(2) The TPH pressure sensor goes OFF, and the thermal pressure motor stops when the sensor goesback ON again.A time-out occurs at 250 ms when the TPH pressure sensor goes OFF, and error message [T19-207] is displayed. Likewise, a time-out occurs at 1 s when the TPH pressure sensor goes back onagain, and error message [T19-208] is displayed.

Max 1 s (Error: 210)

Brake

100 msMax 250 ms(Error: 207)

TPH pressuresensor

Thermalpressure motor

Release

OFF

Compress

(1)

(2)ON

OFF

Page 247: RN Technical Manual

14 – 23RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL MASTER MAKING OPERATION

[Master Positioning Operation]

The master positioning operation starts after master cutting is complete when setting the master loadingunit and master creation.

(1) The master detection sensor detects whether a master is present on starting. If the master detectionsensor is OFF, error message [D05-210] is displayed.

(2) The master end sensor is checked at 10 ms intervals, and if an end mark is detected twice insuccession, error message [C02-200] is displayed.

(3) The write pulse motor and load pulse motor operate in the feed direction until the master positioningsensor goes ON. A time-out occurs here when it has fed 75 mm when setting the master loadingunit and 25 mm when inching after cutting, and error message [A01-201] is displayed.

(4) The write pulse motor and load pulse motor operate in the return direction until the masterpositioning sensor goes OFF. A time-out occurs here when it has fed B mm, and error message[A01-202] is displayed. (B = 3 mm + value set in Test mode No. 280)

(5) The master is moved a further B mm in the return direction after the master positioning sensor goesOFF, and then motor then stops, ending the master positioning operation.

When ON: Master positioning sensor: Open, Master detection sensor: Open, Master end sensor: Blocked

10 ms 10 ms

Max A mm (Error: 201)

10 ms

B mm

100 ms

50 msHOLD

50 msHOLD

50 msHOLD

50 msHOLD

Max B mm(Error: 202)

MasterpositioningsensorMaster detectionsensor

Master endsensor

Write pulsemotor

Read/Writesignal

Load pulsemotor

Start End

ON

OFF

Feed

OFF

Return

Feed

OFF

Return

(1)

(3)

(2)

(4)(5)

ON

OFF

ON

OFFON

OFF

Page 248: RN Technical Manual

14 – 24RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL MASTER MAKING OPERATION

[Master Cutting Operation]

When the master making operation starts, the cutter home position switch is checked at the start of themaster cutting operation. Error message [A17-209] is displayed if it is OFF.

(1) The Master cutting operation starts after the print drum stops at angle A during master loading. (A =220° + value set in Test mode No. 284)

(2) The cutter motor operates and stops after the cutter home position switch goes OFF and then backON again.A time-out occurs at 200 ms before the switch goes OFF, and error message [T13-203] is displayed.Likewise, a time-out occurs at 400 ms before the switch goes back ON again, and error message[T13-204] is displayed.

(3) The print drum rotates, and the master positioning sensor is checked when the print drum reachesthe 15° position.If the master positioning sensor is OFF, the process is normal, and master cutting ends.If the master positioning sensor is ON, master cutting is repeated.

(4) The print drum rotates, and the master positioning sensor is rechecked when the print drum reachesthe 15° position.If the master positioning sensor is OFF, error message [A03-206] is displayed.If the master positioning sensor is ON, error message [T13-205] is displayed.

When ON: Master positioning sensor: Open, Master end sensor: Blocked

Max 200 ms(Error: 203)

Max 400 ms(Error: 204)

Max 200 ms(Error: 203)

Max 400 ms(Error: 204)

Masterpositioningsensor

Master endsensor

Cutter homeposition switch

ON

OFF

Cutter motor ON

OFF

Start Normal end Error end

Print drumrotates 15°.

Print drumrotates 15°.

(2)

(1)

(3)(4)ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Page 249: RN Technical Manual

14 – 25RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL MASTER MAKING OPERATION

[Master Making Operation]

The master loading and master making operation start once the thermal print head compressing iscomplete.

(1) The master detection sensor checks for the presence of a master on starting.

(2) The master end sensor is checked at 10 ms intervals during the master transport operation, and ifthe end mark is detected twice in succession, error message [C02-200] is displayed.

(3) The write pulse motor and load pulse motor operate in the feed direction until the master positioningsensor goes ON. A time-out occurs here when the master is fed A mm, and error message [A01-201] is displayed. (A = 3 mm + value set in Test mode No. 280)

(4) The write pulse motor operates once the clamp release operation ends for removing the master, andmaster creation starts after it has been transported to the position for the start of printing. (C = 6.5mm + value set in Test mode No. 281)

(5) The load pulse motor operates to transport the leading edge of the master to the master loadingposition. (D = 95 mm)

MasterpositioningsensorMasterdetectionsensor

Write pulsemotor

Read/Writesignal

Load pulsemotor

ON

OFF

Feed

OFF

Feed

OFF

Return

Start End

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Master creationpossible

(5)

(6) Loading possible

(7)

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Master endsensor

10ms

10ms

10ms

F[d] mm

Max A mm(Error: 201)

D mm

C mm

E[c] mm

300ms

50ms

50ms

50ms

When ON: Master positioning sensor: Open, Master detection sensor: Open, Master end sensor: Blocked

Page 250: RN Technical Manual

14 – 26RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 14. TIMING CHARTS

INDIVIDUAL MASTER MAKING OPERATION

(6) Once the removed master vertical transport ends and the print drum position A adjustment iscomplete, the load pulse motor operates to transport the leading edge of the master to the clampposition. (E = 136.1 mm + value set in Test mode No. 283)

(7) Master creation ends once master creation is complete for the effective printing area.

Page 251: RN Technical Manual

15 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15: PANEL MESSAGES

Contents

1. Explanation of Panel Messages .................................................................................. 15-2

2. List of Panel Messages ................................................................................................ 15-3

3. Details of Panel Messages .......................................................................................... 15-4

4. Backed-up Errors ....................................................................................................... 15-17

Page 252: RN Technical Manual

15 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

EXPLANATION OF PANEL MESSAGES

1. Explanation of Panel Messages

Overview of messages1) Error code displays

• If an error occurs, an error message is displayed together with a graphic and an error code toindicate the problem to the user.

• Error code displays consist of an error type according to the type of error and an error pointnumber corresponding to the error situation.

Example: T99-123 T99: Error type

123: Error point

2) Error type

The order of error priority is as shown below.

Error type Error details

T Serviceman call error

A Jam error

B Option error

C Consumable error

D Set error

E Warning (call serviceman)

3) Error point

The error point classifications are as shown below.

Error point Error details

0XX System (hardware, software, communication), panel

1XX Scanning section (scanner, ADF), image processing

2XX Master making section

3XX Master removal section

4XX Paper feed/ejection section

5XX Print drum

6XX Printing adjustment section (vertical position, density)

7XX Optional equipments (Job separator, Key /Card Counter)

Page 253: RN Technical Manual

15 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

LIST OF PANEL MESSAGES

2. List of Panel Messages

Error type Details

T01 Main motor lock

T02 Elevator motor lock

T03 Clamp motor lock

T04 Overflow

T05 Vertical positioning pulse motor lock

T08 Computer interface error

T11 Pressure control motor lock

T12 Master removal motor lock

T13 Cutter motor lock

T14 Flat bed error

T15 ADF error

T17 Solenoid counter not connected

T19 Thermal pressure motor lock

T20 Master creation motor lock

T23 Scanner lock not released

T24 Inking motor lock

T25 No battery

T98 Hardware error

Error type Details

A01 Master feed error

A02 Master loading error

A03 Cutting error

A04 Master removal error

A05Master present in masterremoval section

A06 Check paper feed tray

A07 Paper feed error

A08 Paper jam on Print Drum

A09 Paper ejection error

A10 ADF original feed error

A16 Awaiting master removal

A17 Cutter error

Error type Details

B01 Key/Card counter: No card

Error type Details

C01 Replace ink cartridge

C02 Replace master roll

C03 Master disposal-box-full

C04 No paper

Error type Details

D01 Print drum not set

D02 Incorrect print drum

D03 Ink cartridge not set

D04 Incorrect ink cartridge

D05 Master not mounted

D07 Master disposal box not set

D09 Master loading unit not set

D10 Scanner table not set

D11 Front cover not set

Error type Details

E01 Replace battery

E02 Maintenance call

Page 254: RN Technical Manual

15 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

3. Details of Panel Messages

Technician errors

Error type T01 [Main motor lock]

Panel display

T01-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T01-***.

Reset method Jam reset -> Power failure/Emergency stop action

Error point Error detection conditions

520Main FG does not go ON/OFF for more than 8 pulses while the main motor is operatingeven after 100 ms has elapsed.

521Position A sensor does not go ON/OFF while the main motor is operating even after 10shas elapsed.

523 Main motor over current.

524Clamp sensors A or B were ON while the print drum operates. (Except during masterremoval)

536 osition A sensor went OFF while stopped at position A.

Error type T02 [Elevator motor lock]

Panel display

T02-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T02-***.

Reset method Jam reset -> Power failure/Emergency stop action

Error point Error detection conditions

400 Both upper and lower limit sensors were ON.

401 Overload current detected in the elevator motor.

404Lower limit sensor does not go OFF within 2 s after the elevator motor operates in the upperdirection from the lower limit position.

405Upper limit sensor does not go ON within 12 s after the elevator motor operates in the upperdirection.

406Upper limit sensor does not go OFF within 2 s after the elevator motor operates in the lowerdirection from upper limit position.

407Lower limit sensor does not go ON within 12 s after the elevator motor operates in the lowerdirection.

408 Upper limit sensor is OFF continuously for at least 2 s during the elevator servo operation.

Page 255: RN Technical Manual

15 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type T03 [Clamp motor lock]

Panel display

T03-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T03-***.

Reset method Jam reset -> Power failure/Emergency stop action

Error point Error detection conditions

501Clamp sensors A and B do not change 3 s after the clamp motor activates during clampinitialization.

502Clamp sensor A or B was ON 13 s after the clamp motor activated during clampinitialization.

503Clamp sensor B does not go ON within 3 s after the clamp motor activates during the clampplate master release operation.

504Clamp sensor A does not go ON and clamp sensor B does not go OFF within 12 s after theclamp motor activates during the clamp plate master release operation.

505Clamp sensor B does not go ON within 3 s after the clamp motor activates during the clampplate master clamp operation.

506Clamp sensor A does not go OFF within 5 s after the clamp motor activates during theclamp plate master clamp operation.

Error type T-04 [Overflow]

Panel display

T04-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T04-***.

Reset method Jam reset and overflow sensor OFF

Error point Error detection conditions

513Overflow sensor was ON for a set number of times in succession during the 10-ms-intervaloverflow check.

Error type [T05 [Vertical positioning pulse motor lock]

Panel display

T05-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T05-***.

Reset methodJam reset -> Recovery operation (home position reset)Or: switch on power again.

Error point Error detection conditions

603Vertical centering sensor does not switch OFF -> ON even when vertical positioning pulsemotor is moved 18 mm in the ON direction.

604Vertical centering sensor does not switch ON -> OFF even when vertical positioning pulsemotor is moved 18 mm in the OFF direction.

612 1-step vertical positioning key was pressed with undefined position data.

Page 256: RN Technical Manual

15 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type T08 [CI error]

Panel display

T08-***A problem has occurred.Switch on power again.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T08-***.

Reset method Switch on power again.

Error point Error conditions

002 CI communication error

Error type T11 [Pressure control motor lock]

Panel display

T11-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T11-***.

Reset methodJam reset -> Recovery operation (home position reset)Or: switch on power again.

Error point Error conditions

600Print pressure control sensor does not go OFF -> ON even when the pressure control motoris moved 3200 pulses in the direction of compression when setting the pressure controlhome position.

601Print pressure control sensor does not go ON -> OFF even when the pressure control motoris moved 3200 pulses in the release direction when setting the pressure control homeposition.

602Print pressure control sensor does not go OFF -> ON even when the pressure control motoris moved 10 pulses to check the home position when setting the pressure control homeposition.

Error type T12 [Master removal motor lock]

Panel display

T12-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T12-***.

Reset method Jam reset -> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

300 Master removal motor (vertical transport motor) overload current detection is ON.

305Master compression sensor does not go ON within 7 s after the master compression motoroperates in the return direction.

306Master compression sensor does not go OFF within 400 ms after the master compressionmotor operates in the direction of compression.

307Master compression sensor does not go ON within 11 s after the master compression motoroperates in the direction of compression.

309Master compression sensor does not go OFF within 3 s after the master compressionmotor operates in the return direction.

Page 257: RN Technical Manual

15 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type T13 [Cutter motor lock]

Panel display

T13-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T13-***.

Reset method Jam reset -> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

203Cutter home position switch does not go OFF within 200 ms after the cutter motor isactivated.

204Cutter home position switch does not go OFF -> ON within 400 ms after the cutter motor isactivated.

205Master positioning sensor is ON when the print drum rotates through the preset angle aftercutting, and master positioning sensor is still ON when the print drum rotates through thepreset angle after repeat cutting.

Error type T14 [Flat bed fault]

Panel display

T14-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T14-***.

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

100Flat bed home position sensor does not go ON at the point when it should go OFF -> ON.(when moved the predetermined amount for FB original scanning or when moving to theADF scanning position.)

101Flat bed home position sensor does not go OFF at the point when it should go ON -> OFF.(when moved the predetermined amount for FB original scanning or when moving to theADF scanning position.)

110 Communication error with shading IC.

Error type T15 [ADF fault]

Panel display

T15-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T15-***.

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

114 ADF original detection signal went OFF during ADF operation.

115 Operation clock of ADF transport motor is not correct.

Page 258: RN Technical Manual

15 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type T17 [Solenoid counter not connected]

Panel display

T17-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T17-***.

Reset method Solenoid counter connection signal ON

Error point Error conditions

020 Solenoid counter is not connected.

Error type T19 [Thermal pressure motor lock]

Panel display

T19-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T19-***.

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

207TPH pressure sensor does not go OFF within 250 ms after the thermal pressure motoractivates.

208 TPH pressure sensor does not go OFF within 1 s after the thermal pressure motor activates.

Error type T20 [Master creation motor lock]

Panel display

T20-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T20-***.

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

416 An overload current was detected in the feed motor.

Error type T23 [Scanner lock not released]

Panel displayT23-***Scanner is locked.Release lock.

Reset method Clear the scanner lock mode. (Test mode No. 155)

Error point Error conditions

111 In scanner lock mode.

Page 259: RN Technical Manual

15 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type T24 [Inking motor lock]

Panel display

T24-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T24-***.

Reset method Jam reset or switch on power again.

Error point Error conditions

539 Inking motor current overload.

Error type T25 [No battery]

Panel display

T25-***A problem has occurred.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T25-***.

Reset methodReplace battery.* The machine does not operate when this error occurs.

Error point Error conditions

026 Residual battery voltage below 1.5 V when power is ON.

Error type T98 [Hardware error]

Panel display

T98-***A problem has occurred.Switch on power again.If resetting is not possible, notify technician of T98-***.

Reset method Switch on power again.

Error point Error conditions

005 Hardware error.

006

Memory check sum error.Memory contents have changed since power was last switched off.

* If this error occurs, a memory fault is identified the next time the power is switched on,and the memory (test mode, user mode, memory mode, and error backup details) iscleared.

028AMF PCB was fitted to machine not compatible with AMF PCB or AMF PCB was not fittedto machine compatible with AMF PCB.

543 Print drum communication error.

Page 260: RN Technical Manual

15 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Jam errors

Error type A01 [Master feed error]

Panel displayA01-***Master jammed.Rewind master, and the reset.

Reset methodMaster loading unit switch: OFF -> ON, then master positioning sensor OFF.(Or switch on power again.)

Error point Error conditions

201Master positioning sensor does not go ON even when the master is fed preset amount afterwrite pulse motor is activated.

202Master positioning sensor does not go OFF even when the master is rewound duringmaster positioning operation.

211 Master positioning sensor was ON during standby.

214 Master positioning sensor was ON at start of master creation.

215 Faulty gate array control for write pulse motor or load pulse motor.

Error type A02 [Master loading error]

Panel displayA02-***Master jammed.Rewind master, and the reset.

Reset methodMaster loading unit switch: OFF -> ON, then master positioning sensor OFF.-> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

509Master loading sensor was OFF when checking master at specified angle in master loadingoperation.

Error type A03 [Cutting error]

Panel displayA03-***Master is not correctly wound onto print drum.Remove master from print drum.

Reset method Print drum set sensor: OFF -> ON -> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

206 Cutting was performed after repeating cutting operation.

Page 261: RN Technical Manual

15 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type A04 [Master removal error]

Panel displayA04-***Cannot eject master.Pull out print drum and remove master.

Reset method Print drum set sensor: OFF -> ON -> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

303 OFF/OFF in removal jam sensor check at 70°/90°.

304 Removal jam sensor was ON at end of removed master feed operation.

314Emergency stop or power failure occurred while releasing clamp in master removaloperation.

Error type A05 [Master present in master removal section]

Panel displayA05-***Master jammed in master removal section.Open master removal unit and remove master.

Reset methodMaster removal unit set sensor: OFF -> ON, and Removal jam sensor: OFF(Or switch on power again.)

Error point Error conditions

312 Removal jam sensor was ON on starting master making operation.

Error type A06 [Check paper feed tray]

Panel displayA06-***Check paper feed tray.

Reset methodPaper feed tray lower safety switch goes ON.(Or switch on power again.)

Error point Error conditions

403 Paper feed tray lower safety switch was OFF.

Error type A07 [Paper feed error]

Panel displayA07-***Paper jammed.Check paper feed side, and press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.

Reset method Set paper sensor to OFF, and reset jam.

Error point Error conditions

409Paper receiving sensor was OFF when paper arrived and paper sensor was ON at 180°just before stopping.

412Paper sensor was OFF three times in succession when detecting first stage paper feedjam. (Non-pickup error)

413 Paper sensor was ON when paper left paper sensor. (Scale error)

418 Paper sensor was ON at start of operation.

Page 262: RN Technical Manual

15 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type A08 [Ejected paper lifting up]

Panel displayA08-***Paper jammed.Pull out print drum and remove jammed paper.

Reset methodPrint drum set sensor: OFF -> ON.(Or switch on power again.)

Error point Error conditions

410Paper receiving sensor was OFF when paper arrived and paper sensor was OFF at 180°just before stopping.

Error type A09 [Paper ejection error]

Panel displayA09-***Paper jammed.Check paper ejection side, and press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.

Reset method Set paper receiving sensor to OFF, and reset jam.

Error point Error conditions

411 Paper receiving sensor was ON when paper left paper receiving sensor.

417 Paper receiving sensor was ON at start of operation.

Error type A10 [ADF original feed error]

Panel display

A10-***Paper jammed.Remove paper while pressing the reset button.Press the lower right "Jam Reset" key.

Reset method Set ADF original detection sensor to OFF, and reset jam.

Error point Error conditions

104ADF original feed error (1): Original was missing when fed in. Original detection sensorwas already ON when power was switched on or when jam was reset. Did not leaveoriginal registration sensor even when fed 543 mm after starting scanning.

105ADF original feed error (2): Did not leave original read sensor even when fed 114 mm afteroriginal registration sensor went OFF.

106ADF original feed error (3): Did not leave paper receiving sensor even when fed 117 mmafter original read sensor went OFF.

107ADF original feed error (4): Did not reach original registration sensor even when fed 182mm after start of feeding in.

108ADF original feed error (5): Did not reach original read sensor even when fed 138 mm afterstart of scanning.

109ADF original feed error (6): Did not reach paper receiving sensor even when fed 117 mmafter original read sensor went ON.

Page 263: RN Technical Manual

15 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type A17 [Cutter fault]

Panel displayA17-***Problem occurred.Remove master and close master creation unit.

Reset methodMaster loading set unit: OFF -> ON, and Master detection sensor: OFF-> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

209 Cutter home position switch was OFF during master setting at start of master creation.

Error type A16 [Awaiting master removal]

Panel typeA16-***Pull out print drum and remove master mounted on print drum.

Reset method Print drum set sensor: OFF -> ON -> Recovery operation

Error point Error conditions

525 Master not cut due to cutter motor locking at emergency stop.

Option errors

Error type B01 [Card counter: No card]

Panel displayB01-***Insert the card for the card counter.

Reset method Insert card.

Error point Error conditions

728 No card counter card.

Error type C01 [Replace ink cartridge]

Panel displayC01-***Ink is exhausted.Replace ink cartridge.

Reset method Ink cartridge set switch: OFF -> ON.

Error point Error conditions

512 Ink sensor does not go ON even when inking is run for preset period.

Consumable errors

Page 264: RN Technical Manual

15 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type C02 [Replace master roll]

Panel displayC02-***No more masters.Replace master roll.

Reset method Master loading sensor: OFF -> ON, and Master detection sensor: OFF -> ON.

Error point Error conditions

200 Master end detected twice in succession at 10 ms interval check during master transport.

Error type C03 [Master disposal-box-full]

Panel displayC03-***Empty master disposal box.

Reset method Disposal box full sensor to ON after switching OFF for 5 s.

Error point Error conditions

308 Master disposal box detected as full by disposal box full sensor.

313 Master disposal box detected as full by software master count.

Error type C04 [No paper]

Panel displayC04-***Set paper.

Reset method Paper detection sensor to ON.

Error point Error conditions

402 Paper detection sensor was OFF.

Setting check errors

Error type D01 [Print drum not set]

Panel displayD01-***Set print drum.

Reset method Print drum safety switch: ON, and Print drum set sensor: ON.

Error point Error conditions

526 Print drum safety switch was ON and print drum set sensor was OFF on setting print drum.

527 Print drum safety switch was OFF.

546Print drum set sensor does not go ON within 2 s after print drum safety switch goes OFF ->ON on setting print drum.

Page 265: RN Technical Manual

15 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type D02 [Incorrect print drum]

Panel displayD02-***Incorrect print drum.Set correct print drum.

Reset method Replace with correct print drum.

Error point Error conditions

532 Print drum is incorrect.

Error type D04 [Incorrect ink cartridge]

Panel displayD04-***Incorrect ink cartridge.Set correct ink cartridge.

Reset method Replace with correct ink cartridge.

Error point Error conditions

534 Ink cartridge was incorrect.

Error type D03 [Ink cartridge not set]

Panel displayD03-***Set ink cartridge.

Reset method Ink cartridge set switch: ON

Error point Error conditions

533 Ink cartridge set switch was OFF.

Error type D05 [Master not mounted]

Panel displayD05-***Master is not mounted correctly.Insert leading edge of master in inlet and close master creation unit.

Reset method Master detection sensor: ON.

Error point Error conditions

210 Master detection sensor was OFF.

Error type D07 [Master disposal box not set]

Panel displayD07-***Set master disposal box.

Reset method Master removal section safety switch: ON.

Error point Error conditions

310 Master disposal box set switch was OFF.

Page 266: RN Technical Manual

15 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

DETAILS OF PANEL MESSAGES

Error type D09 [Master loading unit not set]

Panel displayD09-***Close master loading unit.

Reset method Master loading unit switch: ON.

Error point Error conditions

212 Master loading unit switch was OFF.

Error type D10 [Scanner table not set]

Panel displayD10-***Set scanner table.

Reset method Scanner table set switch: ON.

Error point Error conditions

213 Scanner table set switch was OFF.

Error type D11 [Front cover not set]

Panel displayD11-***Close front cover.

Reset method Front cover set switch: ON.

Error point Error conditions

535 Front cover set switch was OFF.

Warnings

Error type E01 [Replace battery]

Panel display

E01-***Battery must be replaced.Contact technician.(Press lower right "Jam Reset" to continue operation.)

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

010Battery voltage is less than 2.1 V when power is switched ON, reset, or operation ended.(Battery replacement)

Page 267: RN Technical Manual

15 – 17RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 15. PANEL MESSAGES

BACKED-UP ERRORS

Error type E02 [Call technician]

Panel display

E02-***Time for periodic maintenance.Contact technician.(Press lower right "Jam Reset" to continue operation.)

Reset method Jam reset

Error point Error conditions

011Number of masters completed reached value set in Test mode when power was switchedON, reset, or operation ended.

012Number of prints completed reached value set in Test mode when power was switched ON,reset, or operation ended.

022Maintenance counter inside print drum reached value set in Test mode when power wasswitched ON, reset, or operation ended.

4. Backed-up Errors

The following errors are backed up and are not cleared even when the power is switched off.

Error type Error details

T01 Main motor lock

T03 Clamp motor lock

T13 Cutter motor lock

T18 Master mounting motor lock

A02 Master mounting error

A03 Cutting error

A04 Master removal error

A16 Awaiting master removal

A17 Cutter fault

C01 Replace ink cartridge

C02 Replace master roll

C03 Master disposal-box-full

Page 268: RN Technical Manual

16 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16: TEST MODE

Contents

1. Procedures ................................................................................................................... 16-2

1) Start-up Procedure ................................................................................................. 16-2

2) Operating Procedure ............................................................................................. 16-2

3) Ending Procedure .................................................................................................. 16-3

2. Checking Sensors and Switches ................................................................................. 16-4

3. Checking Motors and Solenoids .................................................................................. 16-6

4. Checking Unit Operations ............................................................................................ 16-7

5. Data Check ................................................................................................................. 16-10

6. Data Setting .................................................................................................................16-11

Print Drum Code Settings .......................................................................................... 16-18

Page 269: RN Technical Manual

16 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

PROCEDURES

Test Mode

1. Procedures

1) Start-up Procedure

Switch on the power while pressing the “Master/Print” and “Text/Photo” keys simultaneously.

2) Operating Procedure

Test mode numbers can be entered (selected) either via “Key entry” or “Menu selection.”

a) Key entry procedure

(1) Enter the number of the test mode to be run using the numeric keys while in standby mode.If a mistake is made when entering, entry can be repeated by pressing the “C” key.

(2) Press the “Start” key to start the Test mode operation.

(3) Press the “Stop” or “Start” key to end the Test mode operation and return to standby mode.

* When setting data, pressing the “Start” key confirms the data changes and returns you tostandby mode. Pressing the “Stop” key cancels the settings before returning to standbymode.

b) Menu selection method

(1) While in standby mode, select the unit containing the test item to be run from the Test modemenu.

• Highlight the unit name using the up/down keys or function keys, and then press the“Enter” key.

• The Test mode sub-menu appears.

(2) Select the test item to be run from the Test mode sub-menu.

• Highlight the test item using the cursor keys or function keys, and then press the “Enter”key.

(3) Press the “Start” key to start the Test mode operation.

(4) Press the “Stop” or “Start” key to end the Test mode operation and return to standby mode.

Test mode menu display Test mode sub-menu display

“Enter”key ON

“Close” key ON

Page 270: RN Technical Manual

16 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

PROCEDURES

Technician contact entry screen display (Test mode No. 091)

Entering/editing telephone number

• Enter digits using the numeric keys, hyphensusing the “*” key, and spaces using the “C” key.

• Edit by moving the cursor to the character to becorrected using the left and right cursor keys,and then overwrite.

Entering/editing retailer name

• Select the character to be entered using thecursor keys, and press the “Input” key to inputthe character at the cursor position in the label.

• To edit, press “Back” to delete characters oneby one from the current cursor position, andthen enter the new characters. (Correctionmidway is not possible.)

• Press “Cancel” to cancel all input and return tothe previous screen.

• When input is complete, press “Enter” to returnto the previous screen.

3) Ending Procedure

To end Test mode, press the “All Reset” key for 1 second in Test mode standby or in Test modeoperation standby.

Display during check operation Display during data setting

Display during Test mode operation

“Change name”key ON

“Enter” key,“Cancel” key

ON

Page 271: RN Technical Manual

16 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

CHECKING SENSORS AND SWITCHES

2. Checking Sensors and Switches

Indicates sensor and switch status using audible beeps.

• Detected: 0.1 second interval sound (short beeps)

• Not detected: 0.5 second interval sound (long beeps)

No. Test item Detection status

100 Image scanner ADF shading sensor Blocked (shading plate present)

101 Flat bed original detection sensor Open (original present)

110 ADF original registration sensor Blocked

111 ADF original IN sensor Blocked (reflection blocked)

112 Original OUT sensor Blocked

113 ADF original detection sensor Open (original present)

117 Cover open sensor Blocked

119 ADF unit detection signal Signal present (ADF connected)

200 Master positioning sensor Open (master present)

201 Master end sensor Blocked (master end label detected)

202 Master detection sensor Open (master present)

203 Cutter home position switch Switch OFF

204 TPH pressure sensor Blocked (TPH pressure plate closed)

205 Master loading unit sensor Blocked (master loading unit closed)

206 Flat bed set switch Switch ON

300 Master removal sensor Blocked (master present)

301 Master compression sensor Blocked (master compression plate present)

302 Disposal-box-full sensor Blocked

303 Disposal box safety switch Switch ON

400 Paper detection sensor Open (paper present)

401 Paper size detection sensor Open (paper present)

402 Upper limit sensor Blocked (shading plate present)

404 Lower limit sensor Blocked (shading plate present)

405 Paper sensor Open (paper present)

406 Paper receiving sensor Blocked (paper present)

408 Paper feed tray lower safety switch Switch ON

409 Elevator down switch Switch ON

412 Encoder sensor (paper ejec. motor) Blocked (shading plate present)

Page 272: RN Technical Manual

16 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

CHECKING SENSORS AND SWITCHES

No. Test item Detection status

500 Position A sensor Blocked (shading plate present)

502 Main motor encoder sensor Blocked (shading plate present)

503 Clamp sensor A Blocked (shading plate present)

504 Clamp sensor B Blocked (shading plate present)

506 Master sensor Open (master present)

509 Ink sensor In contact with ink

510 Overflow sensor In contact with ink

511 Ink cartridge set switch 1 Switch ON

512 Ink cartridge set switch 2 Switch ON

513 Ink cartridge set switch 3 Switch ON

514 Ink cartridge set switch 4 Switch ON

515 Ink cartridge set switch 5 Switch ON

516 Print drum free rotation switch Switch ON

517 Front cover set switch Switch ON

518 Print drum release switch Switch ON

519 Print drum set sensor Blocked (shading plate present)

520 Print drum safety switch Switch ON

600 Print pressure control sensor Blocked (shading plate present)

601 Vertical centering sensor Blocked (shading plate present)

Page 273: RN Technical Manual

16 – 6RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

CHECKING MOTORS AND SOLENOIDS

3. Checking Motors and Solenoids

Press the “Start” key to switch ON, and either the “Start” or “Stop” key to switch OFF.

No. Test item Remarks

030 Audible beep check 1 0.1 second interval

031 Audible beep check 2 0.5 second interval

130 CCD lamp Illuminates

132 ADF read pulse motor (CW)

133 ADF read pulse motor (CCW)

230 Thermal pressure motor (CW)

231 Thermal pressure motor (CCW)

232 Write pulse motor (feed) CW

233 Write pulse motor (return) CCW

234 Load pulse motor (feed) CW

235 Load pulse motor (return) CCW

237 Cutter motor

238 TPH thermal power

330 Master removal motor CW

430 Paper ejection motor

431 Suction fan

432 Separation fan

530 Main motor (15 rpm)

531 Main motor (30 rpm)

532 Clamp motor (forward) CCW

533 Clamp motor (reverse) CW (Only in Test mode)

535 Print drum release switch-LED

Page 274: RN Technical Manual

16 – 7RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

CHECKING UNIT OPERATIONS

No. Test mode details

050 Print test A (checker flag pattern)

Creates a master for test pattern 1.

051 Print test B (mesh pattern)

Creates a master for test pattern 2.

056 Paper passage test (continuous printing)Passes paper through.* "Speed" key can be used.

057 Low-speed printing

Prints at 15 rpm.

059 Auto power off signal

Switches off power.

060 Key check

Pressing a key displays a specified number on the Print quantity LED.

061 LCD check

Displays check pattern on LCD.

062 LED check

LEDs blink alternately

063 Unit initializationRests mechanical components to their home positions. (clamps, vertical position,thermal print head, master compression plate)

150 Shading operation

Runs shading operation.

151 Scanner home position reset

Returns scanner to home position.

152 Scanner 1 cyclePerforms one scanner operation cycle.* Adjusts speed according to the variation rate in Test mode No. 192.

153 Scanner ADF scanning position movement

Moves scanner to ADF scanning position.

154 Scanner lock modeMoves scanner to lock position for transporting.* Error occurs.

155 Undo scanner lock mode

Cancels error status set in Test mode No. 154.

156 ADF original feed 1 cycle

Performs paper passage test for ADF unit alone.

157 ADF original feed operationPerforms ADF original transport operation.* Adjusts speed according to the variation rate in Test mode No. 192.

4. Checking Unit Operations

(1) Press the “Start” key to switch ON and start the unit operation. Error checks are performed basicallythe same as for normal operation. Some operations stop once the sequence is complete, andsome operations continue until a key is pressed.

(2) A continuous audible tone is given if an error occurs. To cancel errors, press the “Reset” key.

Page 275: RN Technical Manual

16 – 8RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

CHECKING UNIT OPERATIONS

No. Test mode details

250 Cutter motor 1 cycle operation

Performs cutting operation.

251 TPH compress operation

Moves TPH to compress position.

252 TPH release operation

Moves TPH to release position.

350 Master compression plate home position reset

Returns the master compression plate to the home position.

351 Master compression 1 cycle operation

Performs one master compression cycle.

352 Master compression 1 step (compress direction)Performs one step (500 ms) of master compression in the direction of compression.* Note that error checking is not performed here.

353 Master compression 1 step (return direction)Performs one step (500 ms) of master compression in the return direction.* Note that error checking is not performed here.

450 Paper width VR Adjustment (105 mm)Sets VR value of 105 mm.* Perform before Test mode No. 451.

451 Paper width VR Adjustment (210 mm)Sets VR value of 210 mm.* Perform after Test mode No. 450.

452 Paper feed tray Up/DownRaises and lowers the paper feed tray repeatedly.* Starts by raising, except when at the upper limit.* Stops when the "Stop" key is pressed.* Stops for 1 s at the upper and lower limits.

453 Elevator servo

Performs servo operation.

454 Feed motor + suction fan

Activates feed motor and suction fan simultaneously.

550 Print drum speed controlUse speed keys to rotate the print drum.* Same operation as for normal printing.

551 Position A operationStops the print drum at position A.* Position including adjustment values.

553 Clamp home position reset

Resets clamp to home position.

554 Clamp movement (3 steps)Press the "Start" key to switch on, and then perform the following operations for eachstep.

Step 1: Release master clamp.Step 2: Open clamp.Step 3: Close clamp.

557 Inking operation

Rotates the print drum and inks until the ink sensor goes ON.

558 Ink-free printing operation

Performs printing without inking.

Page 276: RN Technical Manual

16 – 9RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

CHECKING UNIT OPERATIONS

No. Test mode details

650 Vertical positioning home position reset

Resets the print drum to the vertical center position.

651 Vertical positioning 1 cycle

Performs one vertical positioning cycle.

654 Print pressure home position reset

Resets print pressure to home position.

655 Print pressure 1 cycle

Performs one print pressure change cycle.

656 Print adjustment paper passage testPerforms paper passage operation.* Speed keys can be used. Vertical movement is possible using the vertical position

keys.657 Print adjustment low-speed printing

Prints at 15 rpm.* Vertical movement is possible using the vertical position keys.

750 CI firmware downloadEnables the execution program stored on CI flash memory to be overwritten.* Connection to PC required.

751 CI test print

Prints the test pattern specified at the time of CI connection.

Page 277: RN Technical Manual

16 – 10RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

DATA CHECK

5. Data Check

Press the “Start” key to display data.

* Data check only displays the various settings, and does not allow them to be changed.

No. Data Display details

070 Data setting change confirmationLists Test mode No. and setting for non-default items duringdata setting.

071 Set switch historyDisplays error code (D**) for set switch that causedoperation to stop. (Most recent item)

072 Error historyLists error codes for error codes occurring recently innormal mode. (Max 8 codes)

073 Maintenance count

Displays current maintenance count.* Master count is in units of 100 (9999 = 999900).

Total count and print drum count are in units of 1000(9999 = 9999000).

074 Battery voltage (A/D) Displays residual battery voltage as (A/D).

075 Batter voltage (V) Displays residual battery voltage as (V) * 1000.

270 TPH thermistor (A/D) Displays TPH thermistor AD value.

271 TPH thermistor (°C)Displays TPH thermistor AD value converted to temperature* 100.

371 Removed master software count Displays stored count.

470 Paper width (A/D) Displays 10-bit data after A/D conversion.

471 Paper width (mm) Displays paper width (mm) after adjustment.

570 Print drum encoder count Displays encoder value.

571 Print drum angle Displays print drum angle.

572 Ink temperature sensor (A/D) Displays ink thermistor A/D value.

573 Ink temperature sensor (°C) Displays ink thermistor A/D value converted to °C * 100.

Page 278: RN Technical Manual

16 – 11RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

DATA SETTING

6. Data Setting

(1) Press the “Start” key to display and operate the data currently set.

(2) Change data using the numeric keys. Switch to the ± display using the “*” key.

(3) Once settings have been changed, press the “Enter” or “Start” key to confirm the data and return tostandby.

* Settings will be changed to their default values if values outside the setting ranges are entered.

No. Name

080 Jam clear

DescriptionForcibly clears jam.Consumable errors cannot be cleared.

Setting None

081 Memory clear (user area)

DescriptionResets settings (memory, user mode, timers) other than Test mode data settings,type codes, print drum codes, and ink codes to their default values.* Always save data before resetting.

Setting None

082 Test mode data setting clear

DescriptionResets all settings set in Test modes to defaults values.* Always save data before resetting.

Setting None

083 Maintenance master count setting

Description Sets the number of masters at which the call-technician message is displayed.

SettingRange: 0 - 9999 (*100)Units: 1 (*100)Default: 0

084 Maintenance main unit print count setting

DescriptionSets the number of main unit prints at which the call-technician message isdisplayed.

SettingRange: 0 - 9999 (*1000)Units: 1 (*1000)Default: 0

085 Maintenance print-drum print count setting

DescriptionSets the number of print-drum prints at which the call-technician message isdisplayed. (Set for each print drum.)

SettingRange: 0 - 9999 (*1000)Units: 1 (*1000)Default: 0

087 Maintenance count clear (master creation)

DescriptionClears the master count (within software) for displaying technician call messagethe call-technician message.

Setting None

088 Maintenance count clear (printing)

DescriptionClears the print count (within software) for displaying technician call message thecall-technician message.

Setting None

089 Maintenance count clear (print drum)

DescriptionClears the print-drum print count (within software) for displaying technician callmessage the call-technician message.

Setting None

Page 279: RN Technical Manual

16 – 12RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

DATA SETTING

No. Name

091 Technician contact setting

Description Sets technician contact address and retailer name for displaying on error screens.

Setting* Set using special technician contact setting screen.

Space if not set.094 Minimum print number setting enable

Description Sets the minimum print number set in user mode to Enabled/Disabled.

SettingRange: 1 (Enabled), 0 (Disabled)Default: 1 (Enabled)

095 Solenoid counter enable/disable setting

Description Sets solenoid counter to Enabled/Disabled.

SettingRange: 1 (Enabled), 0 (Disabled)Default: 1 (Enabled)* This setting is reset to default (solenoid enabled) when power is switched on.

180 FB horizontal scanning position adjustment

Description Adjusts the original horizontal scan position using the image sensor.

SettingRange: -35 - +40 (-3.5 mm - +4.0 mm) * (+ is to left)Units: 5 (0.5 mm)Default: 0 mm

181 FB scan start position adjustment

Description Adjusts original scanning start position using the image sensor.

SettingRange: -60 - +60 (-6.0 mm - +6.0 mm) * (+ is downward)Units: 1 (0.1 mm)Default: 0 mm

182 FB scan image elongation and shrinkage adjustment.

DescriptionAdjusts the original scanning speed using the image sensor. (Image sensor travelspeed)

SettingRange: -100 - +100 (-10.0% - +10.0%) * (+ elongates)Units: 1 (0.1%)Default: 0%

184 ADF-ABC mirror position adjustment

Descriptionhanges the ABC scanning position for ADF scanning using mirror positionadjustment.

SettingRange: -20 - +20 (-2.0 mm - +2.0 mm)Units: 1 (0.1 mm) * (+ brings forward scanning start position.)Default: 0 mm

185 ADF horizontal scanning position adjustment

Description Adjusts original horizontal scan position using the image sensor.

SettingRange: -35 - +40 (-3.5 mm - +4.0 mm) * (+ is to left)Units: 5 (0.5 mm)Default: 0 mm

186 ADF scan start position adjustment

Description Adjusts original scanning start position using ADF.

SettingRange: -60 - +60 (-6.0 mm - +6.0 mm) * (+ is downward)Units: 1 (0.1 mm)Default: 0 mm

187 ADF scan image elongation and shrinkage adjustment.

Description Adjusts original scanning speed using ADF. (Transport motor speed)

SettingRange: -100 - +100 (-10.0% - +10.0%) * (+ elongates)Units: 1 (0.1%)Default: 0%

Page 280: RN Technical Manual

16 – 13RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

DATA SETTING

No. Name

188 Slice level setting

DescriptionSets text mode slice level.(Finer for larger values)

SettingRange: -16 - +16Units: 1Default: 0

189 ABC slice level setting

DescriptionSets ABC (automatic base control) slice level.(Finer for larger values)

SettingRange: -16 - +16Units: 1Default: 0

192 Scanning speed (for 1 cycle)

Description Sets the change rate for setting FB and ADF scanning pulse motor speeds.

SettingRange: 50% - 200%Units: 1%Default: 100%

193 ADF registration loop amount

Description Adjusts slack when feeding into ADF.

SettingRange: -30 - +30 (-3.0 mm - +3.0 mm)Units: 1 (0.1 mm)Default: 0 mm

Page 281: RN Technical Manual

16 – 14RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

DATA SETTING

No. Name

280 Master setting adjustment

DescriptionAdjusts a small amount of return movement after the master positioning sensorgoes ON for inching operation during master setting or after master cutting.

SettingRange: 0 - 50 (0 mm - 5.0 mm)Units: 1 (0.1 mm)Default: 20 (2.0 mm)

281 Master creation start position adjustment

DescriptionAdjusts the master creation start position (distance from master positioningsensor ON to read/write signal ON).

SettingRange: -30 - +50 (-3.0 mm - +5.0 mm) * (+ is downward)Units: 1 (0.1 mm)Default: 0 mm

282 Master creation length adjustment

Description Adjusts the master creation area (width scanning length).

SettingRange: -100 - +100 (-10.0 mm - +10.0 mm) * (+ increases length)Units: 1 (0.1 mm)Default: 0 mm

283 Clamp range adjustment

Description Adjusts master clamp range when loading master.

SettingRange: -100 - +100 (-10.0 mm - +10.0 mm) * (+ increases clamp range)Units: 1 (0.1 mm)Default: 0 mm

284 Master overall length adjustment (cutting angle)

Description Adjusts the length of one master (cutting timing).

SettingRange: -100 - +200 (-10.0° - +20.0°) * (+ increases master length)Units: 1 (0.1°)Default: 0°

287 Master creation image elongation and shrinkage adjustment

Description Adjusts frequency setting for the master creation pulse motor.

SettingRange: -100 - +100 (-10.0%- +10.0%) * (+ elongates)Units: 1 (0.1%)Default: 0%

Page 282: RN Technical Manual

16 – 15RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

DATA SETTING

No. Name

380 Jam removal detection angle 1

Description Sets the first print drum angle for checking jam removal.

SettingRange: 0 - 3600 (0° - 360°)Units: 10 (1°)Default: 700 (70°)

381 Jam removal detection angle 2

Description Sets the second print drum angle for checking jam removal.

SettingRange: 0 - 3600 (0° - 360°)Units: 10 (1°)Default: 900 (90°)

382 Master removal motor stop timing

Description Sets master-removal-motor stop timing after the print drum stops at position A.

SettingRange: 0 - 2000 (0 s - 2 s)Units: 10 (0.01 s)Default: 0 s

384 Master compression plate return timing

DescriptionSets master-compression-plate stop timing after moving to the compressionposition until it starts to return.

SettingRange: 0 s - 100 sUnits: 1 sDefault: 1 s

386 Master disposal box count

Description Sets count for full master disposal box.

SettingRange: 40 - 50Units: 1Default: 50

387 Master removal print drum speed

DescriptionSets the print drum speed for master removal.* Master removal feed motor speed is fixed.

SettingRange: 10 - 60 rpmUnits 5 rpmDefault: 15 rpm

389 Software count clear

Description Clears program count for removed masters.

Setting None

Page 283: RN Technical Manual

16 – 16RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

DATA SETTING

No. Name

481 Paper feed clutch ON angle adjustment

Description Adjusts angle timing for activating paper feed clutch.

SettingRange: -200 - +200 (-20.0° - +20.0°) * (+ delays ON timing)Units: 2 (0.2°)Default: 0°

482 Paper feed clutch OFF angle adjustment (standard)

DescriptionAdjusts angle timing for deactivating the paper feed clutch according to the papertype (standard).

SettingRange: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays OFF timing)Units: 2 (0.2°)Default: 0°

483 Paper feed clutch OFF angle adjustment (card)

DescriptionAdjusts angle timing for deactivating the paper feed clutch according to the papertype (card).

SettingRange: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays OFF timing)Units: 2 (0.2°)Default: 0°

484 Paper feed clutch OFF angle adjustment (thin paper)

DescriptionAdjusts angle timing for deactivating paper the feed clutch according to the papertype (thin paper).

SettingRange: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays OFF timing)Units: 2 (0.2°)Default: 0°

485 Paper feed clutch OFF angle adjustment (special)

DescriptionAdjusts angle timing for deactivating the paper feed clutch according to the papertype (special).

SettingRange: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays OFF timing)Units: 2 (0.2°)Default: 0°

486 First stage paper feed jam detection angle adjustment

Description Sets angle timing for detecting the first-stage paper feed jam.

SettingRange: -200 - +200 (-20.0° - +20.0°) * (+ delays detection)Units: 2 (0.2°)Default: 0°

487 Paper ejection IN jam detection angle adjustment

Description Adjusts the angle used to detect paper jams during paper ejection.

SettingRange: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays detection)Units: 2 (0.2°)Default: 0°

488 Paper ejection IN jam detection angle adjustment

Description Adjusts the angle used to detect paper jams during paper ejection.

SettingRange: -150 - +150 (-15.0° - +15.0°) * (+ delays detection)Units: 2 (0.2°)Default: 0°

Page 284: RN Technical Manual

16 – 17RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

DATA SETTING

No. Name

580 Master detection angle adjustment

Description Adjusts the angle used to detect master loading.

SettingRange: -200 - +100 (-20.0° - +10.0°) * (+ delays detection)Units: 2 (0.2°)Default: 0°

581 Position A stop position adjustment

Description Adjusts the print drum position A stop position.

SettingRange: -40 - +40 (-4.0° - +4.0°) * (+ increases distance from stop)Units: 2 (0.2°)Default: -20 (-2.0°)

583 No ink time (normal)

Description Sets no ink detection time.

SettingRange: 1 - 127 sUnits: 1 sDefault: 20 s

584 No ink time (at replacement)

Description Sets no-ink detection time after replacing the ink cartridge.

SettingRange: 1 - 127 sUnits: 1 sDefault: 40 s

585 Overflow detection cycles

DescriptionSets detection cycles for the overflow sensor to determine that an overflow hasoccurred. (This data is stored on print drum EEPROM.)

SettingRange: 1 - 200 cyclesUnits: 1 cycleDefault: 50 cycles

586 Minimum print drum speed for inking

Description Sets the minimum print drum speed for inking.

SettingRange: 5 - 100 rpmUnits: 5 rpmDefault: 15 rpm

588 Print drum code

Description Sets the print drum code. (See page 16-18 for print drum code settings.)

Setting

Range: 0 - 16Units: 1Default: 0* Run Test mode No. 557 (inking operation) after setting.

589 Proof-read print speed table (black ink)

Description Sets speed table for determining speed proof-read print.

SettingRange: 0 (slow), 1 (normal), 2 (fast)Default: 1 (normal)

590 Proof-read print speed table (color ink)

Description Sets the speed table for determining the speed proof-read print.

SettingRange: 0 (slow), 1 (normal), 2 (fast)Default: 1 (normal)

Page 285: RN Technical Manual

16 – 18RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 16. TEST MODE

DATA SETTING

Print Drum Code Settings

Code Size Type Compatible machines

1A3

Black

2 Color

3B4

BlackRN2050 / RN2150

4 Color

5A4

BlackRN2000 / RN2100

6 Color

7A4R

Black

8 Color

9Ledger

Black

10 Color

11Legal

BlackRN2030 / RN2130

12 Color

13Letter

Black

14 Color

15Spare

Black

16 Color

No. Name

680 Vertical print home position adjustment

Description Sets offset for vertical print home position.

SettingRange: -100 - +500 (-10.0 mm - +50.0 mm) * (+ is upwards)Units: 1 (0.1 mm)Default: 0

682 Print pressure home position adjustment

Description Sets offset for print pressure home position

SettingRange: -50 - +50 pulses * (+ compresses)Units: 1 pulseDefault: 0 pulses

Page 286: RN Technical Manual

17 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 17: USERS MODE

Contents

1. Customizing the Initial Setting ..................................................................................1-2

Page 287: RN Technical Manual

17 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 17. USERS MODE

1. Customizing the Initial Settings

CUSTOMIZING THE INITIAL SETTINGS

Page 288: RN Technical Manual

17 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 17. USERS MODE

CUSTOMIZING THE INITIAL SETTINGS

Page 289: RN Technical Manual

17 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 17. USERS MODE

CUSTOMIZING THE INITIAL SETTINGS

Page 290: RN Technical Manual

17 – 5RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 17. USERS MODE

CUSTOMIZING THE INITIAL SETTINGS

Page 291: RN Technical Manual

18 – 1RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 18: MISCELLANEOUS PRECAUTIONS

Contents

1. ROM Replacement ....................................................................................................... 18-2

2. Battery Replacement .................................................................................................... 18-2

3. Main PCB Replacement ............................................................................................... 18-2

4. Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB Replacement ................................................................ 18-2

5. Print Position Adjustment ............................................................................................. 18-3

6. Notes on Stay Assembly .............................................................................................. 18-3

Page 292: RN Technical Manual

18 – 2RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 18. MISCELLANEOUS PRECAUTIONS

ROM REPLACEMENT

1. ROM Replacement

Switch off the power, remove the rear cover, and then replace the ROM on the main PCB.

* When replacing the ROM, it is not necessary to clear or set data.

2. Battery Replacement

Replace the battery on the main PCB with the power to the main unit switched on.

* Data may be lost if the power to the main unit is not switched on.

3. Main PCB Replacement

(1) Note down the following details before replacement.

• User mode

• Test mode setting change data

(2) Switch off the power and replace the Main PCB.

(3) Remove the battery, IC18 and ROM from the old Main PCB, and install them on the new Main PCB.

(4) Start Test mode.

(5) Run Test mode No. 80 (Jam clear).

(6) Run Test mode No. 81 (Memory clear).

(7) Run Test mode No. 82 (Test mode data setting clear).

(8) Disable the solenoid counter using Test mode No. 95 (Solenoid counter enable/disable setting).(when the solenoid counter must be disabled for replacement.)

(9) Run Test mode No. 588 (Print drum code) and enter print drum code currently set. (See page 16-18.)

(10) Run Test mode No. 557 (Inking).

(11) Run Test mode No. 450 (Paper width VR adjustment 105 mm) and Test mode No. 451 (Paper widthVR adjustment 210 mm) in sequence.

(12) Enter the details noted down in step (1).

4. Ink Cartridge Set Switch PCB Replacement

(1) Pull out the print drum, and replace the Ink cartridge set switch PCB .

(2) Mount the print drum in the main unit.

(3) Start Test mode.

(4) Disable the solenoid counter using Test mode No. 95 (Solenoid counter enable/disable setting).(when the solenoid counter must be disabled for replacement.)

(5) Run Test mode No. 588 (Print drum code) and enter the print drum code currently set. (See page16-18.)

(6) Run Test mode No. 557 (Inking).

(7) Switch on power again.

Page 293: RN Technical Manual

18 – 3RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 18. MISCELLANEOUS PRECAUTIONS

PRINT POSITION ADJUSTMENT

5. Print Position Adjustment

(1) Adjust master creation image elongation and shrinkage. (See page 13-20.)

(2) Adjust scanning image elongation and shrinkage. (See page 11-22 for flat bed unit, and page 12-24for ADF unit.)

(3) Adjust the master clamp amount. (See page 13-20.)

(4) Adjust scanning start position. (See page 11-23 for flat bed unit, and page 12-22 for ADF unit.)

(5) Adjust the master making start position. (See 13-21.)

(6) Adjust the vertical print home position.

• If the print position is offset from the original even after performing adjustment steps (1) to (5),measure the offset, and adjust by the offset amount in Test mode No. 680 (Vertical print homeposition).

* The print position adjustment procedures assume that the mechanical sections, such as the main unitdrive section, paper feed section, and print drum, have been correctly adjusted. Check and adjust themechanical sections first.Likewise, set the data for ADF section adjustment only after mechanically adjusting the flat bed unit.

6. Notes on Stay Assembly

The stay assembly on the main unit drive section is positioned using jigs during factory assembly. Do notloosen or remove the stay assembly mounting screws, as the stay cannot be repositioned once removed.

Stay assembly

Page 294: RN Technical Manual

18 – 4RN (Version 1.0)

CHAPTER 18. MISCELLANEOUS PRECAUTIONS

[Memo]

Page 295: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 1 ]

CHAPTER 19 DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

Contents

1.CONNECTIONS

1)BLOCK CHART .............................................................................................. 19-2

2)POWER SUPPLY AREA................................................................................. 19-3

3)PANEL CONTROL AREA ............................................................................... 19-4

4)MOTOR CONTROL AREA .............................................................................. 19-5

5)MASTER REMOVAL AREA ............................................................................ 19-6

6)PAPER FEED AREA ...................................................................................... 19-7

7)PRINT DRUM AREA ....................................................................................... 19-8

8)PAPER EJECTION AREA .............................................................................. 19-9

9)MASTER MAKING AREA ............................................................................. 19-10

10)SCANNER AREA ....................................................................................... 19-11

11)OPTIONS .................................................................................................... 19-12

2.LOCATION OF PCBS........................................................................................ 19-13

3..PCB FUNCTION DETAIL .................................................................................. 19-14

4.SYSTEM PCB ................................................................................................... 19-15

5.POWER SUPPLY UNIT ..................................................................................... 19-16

6.DRIVE PCB....................................................................................................... 19-18

7.PANEL CONTROL PCB .................................................................................... 19-19

8.PRINT DRUM CONTROL PCB .......................................................................... 19-20

9.ADF PCB .......................................................................................................... 19-21

COLOR ABBREVIATION IS AS FOLLOWS

W:WHITE R:RED

BL:BLUE B:BLACK

BR:BROWN O:ORANGE

Y:YELLOW GY:GRAY

GN:GREEN V:VIOLET

《2000.07.11》

Page 296: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 2 ]

1.Connections

1)Block Chart

MO

TO

R C

ON

TR

OL

A

RE

AC

N406

CN

403

CN

203

CN

201

CN

103

CN

107

PO

WE

R S

UP

PLY

A

RE

A

CN

302

PA

NE

L C

ON

TR

OL

A

RE

A

CN

208

CN

301

CN

104

MA

ST

ER

RE

MO

VA

L

A

RE

A

CN

202

PA

PE

R F

EE

D A

RE

A/M

OT

OR

CO

NT

RO

L R

IGH

T S

IDE

CN

204

PR

INT

DR

UM

AR

EA

PA

PE

R E

JEC

TIO

N /C

LU

MP

/MO

TO

R C

ON

TR

OL

LE

FT

SID

E

MA

ST

ER

MA

KIN

G

AR

EA

CN

205

CN

106

SC

AN

NE

R A

RE

AC

N211

CN

212

CN

206

CN

207

CN

213

CN

214

RIN

C2

C/I

PO

WE

R

TP

H

DR

IVE

MM

U

PA

NE

LR

EJE

CT

FR

ON

T

SU

CT

ION

SC

AN

NE

R

FB

/AD

F

ST

SC

N209

CN

407

OP

TIO

NS

CA

RD

CN

210

OP

TIO

NC

N218

021-

5050

0

SYSTEM-PCB

FIL

TE

R P

CB

CN

101

CN

102

RE

LA

Y P

CB

MA

IN S

W

CN

105

CN

404

Page 297: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 3 ]

PO

WE

R S

UP

PL

Y U

NIT

SYSTEM-PCB

CN

201

DRIVE-PCB

CN

104

CN

107

CN

103

PA

NE

L C

ON

TR

OL

U

NIT

55

66

-12

A5

56

6-1

2A

5 64G

ND

2+

24V

G

+5V

32O

PO

WE

R-O

FF

GN

D

1O

PO

WE

R-F

AIL

10

11

8 9+

5V

GN

D2

OT

PH

_EN

BG

ND

12

+24V

B

7

1 12

11

9 10

5 7 863 42

+24V

C

TPH

1

CN

106

12

11

9 10

5 7 863 42

DF

1B

-14

P-2

.5D

SA

14

13

+18V

-S GN

D4

GN

D4

GN

D4

GN

D4

GN

D4

GN

D4

+18V

+18V

+18V

+18V

+18V

+S

+2

4V

M1

1 9 105 7 863 42

GN

D2

GN

D2

GN

D3

+24V

A

+24V

B

5 7 863 42

31 23

RE

LA

Y4

+24V

1 2

CN

405

CN

401

1+

5V

GN

D1

2C

N302

14

12

13

11

10

97 85 63 41 2

CN

101

3 41 2

Input F

il

PLU

G

CN

102

3 5 641 2

AC

OU

T(

L)

AC

OU

T(

N)

AC

IN(

N)

AC 

IN(

L)

CN

105

1 2

AP

O(

Au

to P

ow

er

Off

ou

t)

+24V

B

CN

108

12

3

TE

RM

INA

L F

OR

AD

JUS

TIN

G T

PH

TH

ER

MA

L P

OW

ER

B4P

7-V

H

B3B

-EH

-A

55

66

-10

A

B06P

-VL

17

54

87

-2

B3B

-XH

-A

55

66

-8A

DF

1B

-4P

-2.5

DS

B4P

2-V

H

S14B

-XH

-A

VH

R-7

N

XH

P-1

4

5557

-12R

55

57

-12

R

55

57

-10

R

DF

1B

-14

DS

-2.5

RC

55

57

-8R

VLP

-06V

17

92

28

-2

DF

1B

-4S

-2.5

R

65 7

02

1-5

10

00

02

1-5

10

02

02

1-5

10

37

02

1-5

10

00

02

1-5

10

38

+5V

GN

D1

02

1-5

10

39

02

1-5

05

00

01

8-6

00

31

-00

7

CN

109

CN

110

02

1-5

05

06

PN

L-C

TL-P

CB

02

1-5

05

09

02

1-5

10

35

02

1-5

05

08

P

SU

NIT

(P

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

UN

IT)

VH

R-2

N

24V

8A

/12

5V

AC

3.1

5A

/12

5V

AC

3.1

5A

/12

5V

AC

3.1

5A

/12

5V

AC

3.1

5A

/12

5V

AC

24V

-B

24V

-C

24

V-M

24V

-G

24V

-A

18v

Circ

uit

18V

Inte

rlo

ck I

np

ut

MA

IN B

OD

Y F

RA

ME

MA

ST

ER

LO

AD

ING

UN

IT

GR

OU

ND

AC

IN

(L)

AC

IN

(N)

AC

SU

PP

LY

10

A/1

25

VA

C

SW

-OU

T(L

)

F5

F4

F6

F3

F2

GR

OU

ND

MA

ST

ER

LO

AD

ING

UN

IT

F1

BL

B R OBR

YWV GY

BR

Y GN

OR

B OR BR

BWBR

OORBL

W

O O BBBR

R BR

RO BR

W B W B

RE

LA

Y-P

CB

B8B

-VH

CN

801

2

34 1

1

3

44

4-2

00

00

-00

3

Main

SW

(M

ats

ush

ita)

56-

4 2

4

316

5 6

31 6 8

VH

R-8

N

RINC2

4

1

32

PO

WE

R S

UP

PL

Y U

NIT

;SC

3K

B3P

5-V

H

41 32

B3P

5-V

HV

HR

-5N

VH

R-5

N

55 4 23 1

4

12

3

CN

803

4

123

4

1

32

CN

804

CN

802

3 16 4

XH

P-4

XH

P-4

XH

P-5

B5B

-XH

-A

021-51045

02

1-5

10

62

021-51047

5 5

VLP

-06V

VLR

-06V

17

92

28

-2

02

1-5

10

46

AC

OU

T(

N)

AC

OU

T(

L)

AC

IN(

N)

AC 

IN(

L)

GNDGNDVCCVCC

PWRCTRL

AC (L)AC (N)

GND

VCC

VCC

GND

FR

AM

E

GROUND

TP

H260R

30

B W

AJ8

R2

01

4B

C

BR

R

WB WB

BRR

YO

GN

W B

02

1-5

05

02

O O

BL

BL

R R

WBWB

10

1-5

10

01

-00

4

02

1-5

05

07

-00

9

B W B W

2)POWER SUPPLY AREA

Page 298: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 4 ]

PA

NE

L C

ON

TR

OL A

RE

A

1

21

(16

)

20

(17

)

19

(18

)14

13

1232

SY

ST

EM

-PC

B

021-5

0500

MC

T3

6p

in A

S

1-3

53

29

3-8

*2

CN

208

10985 64 7 11

18

16

17

15

29(8

)

33(4

)

35(2

)

36(1

)

34(3

)

31(6

)

32(5

)

30(7

)

27

(10

)

28(9

)

26

(11

)

25

(12

)

24

(13

)

23

(14

)

22

(15

)

36

(18

)

35

(17

)

34

(16

)

33

(15

)

32

(14

)

31

(13

)

30

(12

)

29

(11

)

28

(10

)

27(9

)

26(8

)

25(7

)

24(6

)

23(5

)

22(4

)

21(3

)

20(2

)

19(1

)

18

17

16

15

14

13

12 11

10

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

PN

L-C

TL

-PC

B

021-5

0502

9 15 3 247 6810

12

1121

LM

32

01

8T

:SH

AR

P

(L

CD

)

4

84-6

0002

CN

302

CN

301

CN

304

CN

303

MA

IN-S

W-P

CB

021-5

0503

CN

305

MC

T3

6p

in A

S

1-3

53

29

3-8

*2

MC

T3

6p

in

3-3

53

30

8-6

MC

T3

6p

in

3-3

53

30

8-6

SM

02

(8.0

)B-B

HS

-1-T

B

52

20

7-1

21

7

9 11

12

107 864 52 31

OW

R

GN

D

OR

D

A4

OC

S

A0

A1

A2

A3

GN

D(C

I)

VC

C(C

I)

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

D0

GN

D

D4

D2

GN

D

GN

D

D1

GN

D

GN

D

D3

GN

D

GN

D

D5

D6

GN

D

D7

OS

W

OL

ED

-K

FL

AT

CA

BL

E

CN

307

CO

NN

EC

TE

R F

OR

AD

JUS

TIN

G L

CD

CO

NT

RA

ST

21

CN

306

SU

B-S

W-P

CB

021-5

0504

021-5

1014

2P

-VH

02

1-5

00

21

PO

WE

R S

UP

PL

Y A

RE

A(C

N1

03

)

CN

309

CN

310

CN

311

5 61 3 42

5 63 421 3 5 641 2

CN

312

CN

313

CN

314

654321

CO

M0

LE

D6

CO

M2

LE

D7

CO

M3

LE

D4

LE

D2

LE

D1

CO

M1

LE

D2

LE

D0

LE

D5

D0

CP

1

N.C

.

DIS

P O

FF

CP

2

S

VS

S

VE

E

D1

D3

VD

D

D2

7S

EG

-PC

B

021-5

0511

CN

30

9C

N3

05

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

26

30

32

31

28

29

27

18

22

24

25

23

20

21

19

14

16

17

15

13

12

11

10

98765431 2

KO

UT

0

KO

UT

1

KO

UT

2

KO

UT

3

KO

UT

4

KIN

0

VC

C(C

I)

GN

D(C

I)

OC

I-S

W

OC

I-LE

D

CO

M0

CO

M1

CO

M2

CO

M3

SC

K

LA

TC

H

SO

UT

SO

UT

-RE

T

VC

C

VC

C

VC

C

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

KIN

1

KIN

2

KIN

3

KIN

4

KIN

5

KIN

6

KIN

7

CN

30

6C

N3

10

VC

C

26

26

SO

UT

-RE

T

LA

TC

H

CO

M3

CO

M2

CO

M1

CO

M0

18

22

24

25

23

20

21

19

SC

K

14

16

17

15

13

12

11

KIN

7

KIN

6

KIN

5

18

22

24

25

23

20

21

19

14

16

17

15

13

11

12

KO

UT

7

KO

UT

6

KO

UT

5

KO

UT

4

109876543

KIN

4

KIN

3

KIN

2

KIN

1

KIN

0

1 2

9 107 85 63 41 2

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

VC

C

GN

D

VC

C

DE

TA

IL

DE

TA

IL

BO

AR

D T

O B

OA

RD

3)PANEL CONTROL AREA

Page 299: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 5 ]

SOLPRINT DRUM LOCK SOLENOID

TOTAL COUNT

COUNTER

MASTER COUNT

COUNTER

PR

ES

SU

RE

SO

LE

NO

ID

SOL

ELE

VA

TO

R M

OT

OR

PR

INT

PO

SIT

ION

ING

PU

LSE

MO

TO

R

PR

ES

SU

RE

CO

NT

RO

L M

OT

OR

FLAT BED SET SW

PAPER FEED TRAY SAFETY SW

MAIN MOTOR

02

1-5

05

06

SYSTEM-PCB

(CN

203)

PO

WE

R S

UP

PL

Y A

RE

A (

CN

103/1

07)

PRINT DRUM RELEASE SW

LED

A01

A02

A03

A04

01

02

A05

A06

03

04

05

06

A07

A08

B11

B12

B07

B09

B08

B10

B05

B06

B01

B03

B02

B04

24(12)

23(11)

21(09)

22(10)

A11

A12

01

02

03

04

05

06

01

02

03

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

14

13

12

11

10

09

08

07

02

04

05

03

06

26

(09

)

24

(07

)

27

(10

)

25

(08

)

28

(11

)

30

(13

)

32

(15

)

34

(17

)

31

(14

)

29

(12

)

33

(16

)

01

01

23

(06

)

24

(07

)

18

(01

)

20

(03

)

22

(05

)

16

19

(02

)

21

(04

)

17

10

12

14

15

13

09

11

08

06

04

02

05

07

03

25

(08

)

26

(09

)

27

(10

)

28

(11

)

+24VM

FB-ASW

M_MOTOR(-)

M_MOTOR(+)

+24VB

SET_SW1

SET_SW2

SET_SW3

SP

-SC

K

PR

SM

-DA

T

PR

SM

-LA

T

GN

D

GN

D

PR

SM

-SC

K

TB

M-D

AT

CT

L-E

NB

PS

-CLK

SW

-IN

DR

M-T

XD

PS

-LA

T

DR

M-R

XD

P-O

FF

GN

D

GN

D

ELV

-IN

GN

D

GN

D

ELV

-LA

T

ELV

-SC

L

ELV

-DA

T

GN

D

MM

-PW

M

MM

-BR

K

CN

405

CN

401

CN

402

CN

403

CN

404

CN

408

CN

409

PAPER SENSOR(SEND)

KH0542

GND

VCC

VCC

GND

OUT

PAPER SENSOR(RECEIVE)

KH0542

16(04)17(05)18(06)

19(07)

20(08)

1

1

3

2

4

4

5

4

2

3

1

2

3

1

VCC

GND

GND

KP-SEN

VCC

1

1

2

2

1

3

1

3

1

2 1

21

12

12

21

CT

4pin

AS

17

39

77

-4

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2C

T2p

in A

S1

73

97

7-2

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2C

T2p

in A

S1

73

97

7-2

2 13456124 36 5

CT

6pin

AS

17

39

77

-6

CT

6pin

AS

17

39

77

-6

HRSDF1B-3S-2.5R

HRSDF1BA-3EP-2.5RC

CT2pin AS173977-2

CT2pin AS173977-6

CT2pin AS173977-2

CT2pin AS173977-2

CT5pin AS173977-5

CT5pin AS173977-5

CT4pin AS173977-4

CT4pin AS173977-4

DF

9pin

AC

DF

1B

-9S

-2.5

R0

21

-51

03

7

VH

3pin

AC

B3P

-VH

DF

12pin

AC

DF

1B

-12

S-2

.5R

02

1-5

10

37

02

1-5

10

00

MO

LE

X8pin

AC

55

57

-8R

02

1-5

10

37

DF

4pin

AC

DF

1B

-4S

-2.5

R

MCT34pin AS1-353293-7021-51012

021-51012CT24pin AS1-173977-2*2

22

HRSDF1B-3S-2.5R

1

2

3

HRSDF1B-3S-2.5R

SET_SW1

SET_SW23

1

2

HRSDF1B-3S-2.5R

HRSDF1BA-3EP-2.5RC

3 3

1

2

1

2

34 12

07

082

1

1

2

CT2pin AS173977-2

CT2pin AS173977-2

FEED TRAY DESCENT BUTTON

UPPER LIMIT SENSOR

OUT

GND

VCC 1

3

2GP1A73A

VCC

GND

OUT

LOWER LIMIT SENSOR

1

2

3

GP1A73A

09

10

11

13(01)

14(02)15(03)

12

CN

407

02

1-5

10

09

DF

10pin

AC

DF

1B

-10

DS

-2.5

R

DR

UM

AR

EA

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

CT6pin AS173977-6

CT6pin AS173977-6

34

(17

)

31

(14

)

29

(12

)

32

(15

)

30

(13

)

33

(16

)

EL

V-L

OW

ER

PA

PE

R-S

EN

ELV

-UP

PE

R

GN

D

18

(01

)

19

(02

)

20

(03

)

21

(04

)

SP

-DA

TS

P-L

AT

23

(06

)

22

(05

)

15

16

17

TB

M-S

CK

TB

M-L

AT

GN

D

MC

T34

pin

AS

1-3

53

29

3-7

TPH-ASW 09

FB-ASW

08

07

N.C

33

2

1

2

1

PRINT DRUM SAFETY SW

HRSDF1BA-3EP-2.5RC

HRSDF1B-3S-2.5R

MA

ST

ER

RE

MO

VA

L A

RE

A

02

01GND

TCKA

03VCC

MA

IN M

OT

OR

FG

SE

NS

OR

6

2 5

3

4

5

2

12

21

MC

T24

pin

AS

1-3

53

29

3-2

*20

21

-51

01

3

02

1-5

10

51

DR

IVE

-PC

B021-5

0024

021-50024

DISPOSAL BOX SAFETY SW

021-5

0027

PA

PE

R E

JEC

TIO

N/C

LU

MP

/MO

TO

R C

ON

TR

OL

LEF

T S

IDE

3

4

6

5

4

3

2

1

1

2

N.C

PA

PE

R F

EE

D A

RE

A

CN

406

HRSDF1BA-3EP-2.5RC

1

2

3

FRONT COVER SET SW

21

12 51

02

2-0

2

6 5

1 2

12

6543

34

02

1-5

10

22

A(C

N1

3,1

4)

02

1-5

10

65

MO

TO

R C

ON

TR

OL

AR

EA

4)MOTOR CONTROL AREA

Page 300: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 6 ]

MA

ST

ER

RE

MO

VA

L A

RE

A

AM

5003

1C43

1F1

DIS

PO

SA

L B

OX

SA

FE

TY

SW

1754

87-3

CT

2p

inC

T2

pin

CT

4p

in

1739

77-2

431739

77-4

1 2

12

21

2 1

1 2

HO

-MO

φ3

6

HA

-MO

(+)

HA

-MO

(-)

1739

77-2

+2

4V

φ2

8

1-17

3977

-2

CT

12pi

n

6V

CC

7

3 1245

VC

C1

0

HJ-

SE

N

GN

D1

2

11

MA

S-S

EN

GN

D98

79 810

11

12

HM

-SE

N

GN

D

VC

C

64 5

HA

-SE

N

GN

D

VC

C

31 2

1-17

3977

-2

3 125 4679 810

12

11

2 31

GN

D

OU

T

VC

C

31 2

RE

FLE

CT

IVE

TY

PE

SE

NS

OR

KH

0726

1754

87-3

GN

D

OU

T

VC

C

31 2

CT

3p

in

1739

77-3

31 2

1754

87-3

GP

1A73

A

INT

ER

RU

PT

TY

PE

SE

NS

OR

GN

D

VC

C

OU

T1754

87-3IN

TE

RR

UP

T

TY

PE

SE

NS

OR

GP

1A73

AO

UT

GN

D

VC

C

CT

12pi

n

ST

AR

TIN

G C

UR

RE

NT 

18

00

mA

RA

TE

D C

UR

RE

NT  

55

0m

A

RA

TE

D C

UR

RE

NT  

80

mA

ST

AR

TIN

G C

UR

RE

NT 

50

0m

A

MA

ST

ER

RE

MO

VA

L M

OT

OR

MA

ST

ER

CO

MP

RE

SS

ION

MO

TO

R

MA

ST

ER

RE

MO

VA

L S

EN

SO

R

MA

ST

ER

SE

NS

OR

DIS

PO

SA

L B

OX

FU

LL S

EN

SO

R

MA

ST

ER

CO

MP

RE

SS

ION

SE

NS

OR

HR

S 

DF

1BA

-3E

P-2

.5R

C

13

1-35

3293

-21-

3532

97-2

MC

T1

2p

in

CN

202

HJ-

SE

N

GN

D

VC

C

MA

S-S

EN

GN

D

VC

C

HM

-SE

N

GN

D

VC

C

GN

D

HA

-SE

N

VC

C

SY

ST

EM

-PC

B

2

1739

77-2

CT

2p

inC

T2

pin

1739

77-2

HA

-MO

(-)

HA

-MO

(+)

+2

4V

HO

-MO

INT

ER

RU

PT

TY

PE

SE

NS

OR

GP

1A73

A

GP

1A73

A :

LIG

HT

BE

AM

BLO

CK

ED→

HIG

H

021-

5104

302

1-51

054

021-

5105

4

3 1

021-

5105

4

3 1

HR

S 

DF

1B

A-3

EP

-2.5

RC

HR

S 

DF

1B-3

S-2

.5R

DRIVE-PCB

(CN

409)

DRIVE-PCB

(CN

404)

5)MASTER REMOVAL AREA

Page 301: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 7 ]

PA

PE

R F

EE

D A

RE

A

VC

C

3

CR

V16

-1KΩ

RE

FLE

CT

IVE

TY

PE

SE

NS

OR

GP

2A25

RE

FLE

CT

IVE

TY

PE

SE

NS

OR

GP

2A25

PA

PE

R S

IZE

DE

TE

CT

ION

SE

NS

OR

PA

PE

R W

IDT

H P

OT

EN

TIO

ME

TE

R

PA

PE

R D

ET

EC

TIO

N S

EN

SO

R

1754

87-3

KY

-VR

GN

D

2 1

CT

3p

in

1754

87-3

GN

D

OU

T

VC

C

CT

3p

in

1792

28-3

21

3

CT

3p

in

VC

C

OU

T1

GN

D

1

13

CT

3p

in

1792

28-3

23

21 654

1792

28-9

CT

9p

in

8 97

23456

1739

77-9

8 79CT

9p

in

KU

-SE

N

KY

-SE

N

KY

-VR

VC

C

GN

D

VC

C

GN

D

VC

C

GN

D

8 976542 31

MC

T11

pin*

2

1-35

3293

-1*2

KU

-SE

N

VC

C

GN

D

KY

-SE

N

GN

D

VC

C

CN

204

2-35

3308

-2

1739

77-3

1739

77-3

(10

)

(9)

(11

)

21

22

20

17

18

19

(7)

(8)

(6)

(3)

14

16

15

(5)

(4)

13

(2)

GN

D

OU

T

VC

C

2 13

GN

D

OU

T

VC

C

2 13 MA

IN M

OT

OR

EN

CO

DE

R S

EN

SO

R

VE

RT

ICA

L C

EN

TE

RIN

G S

EN

SO

R

3 12

1739

77-4

4P

AP

ER

FE

ED

CR

UT

CH

RA

TE

D C

UR

RE

NT  

0.15

5A

TC

KA

GN

D

VC

C

VC

C

GN

D

TE

N-C

HI

+2

4V

KY

US

I_C

RA

MC

T2

2p

in

12

(1)

INT

ER

RU

PT

TY

PE

SE

NS

OR

GP

1A73

A

GP

1A

73A:

LIG

HT

BE

AM

BLO

CK

ED→

HIG

H

GP

2A

25:

LIG

HT

BE

AM

RE

FL

EC

TE

D→

LO

W

PA

PE

R D

ET

EC

TE

D → 

LOW

PA

PE

R D

ET

EC

TE

D → 

LOW

10

11

3

021-

5101

9

021-

5101

2

1 2 3

VO

LTA

GE

DO

WN

BY

CLO

CK

WIS

E R

OT

AT

ION

1792

28-3

1792

28-3

MO

TO

R C

ON

TR

OL

AR

EA

021-5

0023

SY

ST

EM

-PC

B

021-5

0500

BR

R O Y BL

GN

GY

WV

V V V V VV V VV

VVV V VVVV

6)PAPER FEED AREA

Page 302: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 8 ]

PR

INT

DR

UM

SE

T S

EN

SO

R

GP

1A

75E

OU

T01

VC

C

03

02

GN

D

VC

C

OU

T

OU

T04

03

05

YA

A81

-006

202

OU

T01

GN

D INK

SE

NS

OR

02

04

05

03

01

02

03

01

02

01

01

02

INK

ING

MO

TO

R

021-

5050

5(D

RM

-PC

B;B

K)

021-5

0510(D

RM

-PC

B;C

L)

03

04

01

02

06

08

07

05PR

INT

DR

UM

UN

IT(B

LA

CK

/CO

LO

R)

PG

ND

DR

UM

-TX

D

DR

UM

-RX

D

PO

WE

R-O

FF

VC

C

GN

D

+24V

DF8pin ACDF1B-8DS-2.5R

CT5pin AS175489-5

XH2pin ACXHP-2

INK

-MO

TO

R+

INK

-MO

TO

R-

GN

D

VC

C

DR

UM

-TH

ER

MIS

TO

R

INK

-SE

NS

OR

OV

ER

FL

OW

-SE

NS

OR

GN

D

VC

C

02

01

01

02

SM

2pin

AC

SM

R-0

2V

-N

SM

2pin

AC

SM

P-0

2V

-NC

QR

12pi

n A

C

QR

/P8-1

2P

-C(0

1)

07

08

05

06

03

04

01

02

M

OT

OR

CO

NT

RO

L A

RE

A

(

CN

407)

09

10

11

12

N.C

N.C F.G

INK

CA

RT

RID

GE

SE

T S

EN

SO

R

02

1-5

10

10

02

1-5

10

20

02

1-5

10

10

TE

RM

INA

L F

OR

M4 T

AP

CT3pin AS175489-3

DR

UM

-SE

T

DR

UM

-SE

T

N.C

02

1-5

10

10

QR

12pi

n A

C

QR

/P8-1

2S

-C(0

1)

F.G

N.C

DR

UM

-RX

D

DR

UM

-TX

D

PO

WE

R-O

FF

DR

UM

-SE

T

12

11

09

10

07

08

N.C

GN

D

VC

C

+24V

N.C

PG

ND

06

05

04

03

02

01

DR

AW

ER

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N

CN

50

1

CN

50

2 CN

50

4

CN

50

3

BR R O Y V GY

W B

GN

GY

V BL

GN

YBR

R GN

O

02

1-5

10

09

GY

VBL

GN

YRBR

O

V V V V V BL

BL

BL RB

INK

CA

RT

RID

GE

SE

T S

W

PC

B

7)PRINT DRUM AREA

Page 303: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 9 ]

PA

PE

R E

JEC

TIO

N A

RE

A

SU

CT

ION

UN

IT

SE

PA

RA

TIO

N F

AN

UN

ITGN

D

OU

T

VC

C

PA

PE

R E

JEC

TIO

N M

OT

OR

SU

CT

ION

FA

N

PA

PE

R E

JEC

TIO

N M

OT

OR

EN

CO

DE

R S

EN

SO

R

GP

1A

73

A

GP

2A

20

0L

CS

SE

PA

RA

TIO

N F

AN

VC

C

OU

T

GN

D

SYSTEM-PCB

PA

PE

R R

EC

EIV

ING

SE

NS

OR

GN

D

PR

INT

PR

ES

SU

RE

CO

NT

RO

L S

EN

SO

R

GP

1A

73

A

VC

C

OU

T

OU

TG

P1

A7

5E

PO

SIT

ION

A S

EN

SO

R

VC

C

GN

D

OU

TG

P1

A7

3A

CL

AM

P S

EN

SO

R A

CL

AM

P S

EN

SO

R B

VC

C

GN

D

OU

T

VC

C

GP

1A

73

A

GN

D

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

12

14 15

(01

)

16

(02

)

24

(10

)

23

(09

)

22

(08

)

21

(07

)

20

(06

)

19

(05

)

18

(04

)

17

(03

)

07

06

03

02

01

03

04

05

03

02

01

02

01

01

02

07

06

05

04

03

02

01

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

03

02

01

02

01

02

01

01

02

01

02

03

02

01

01

02

03

03

02

01

03

02

01

01

02

03

06

01

02

03

04

05

CL

AM

P U

NIT

V

VC

C

GN

D

CL

AM

P-A

VC

C

CL

AM

P-B

GN

D

VC

C

DE

TE

CT

-A

VC

C

GN

D

GN

D

PR

ES

S-H

P

PA

PE

R R

EC

EIV

ING

SE

NS

OR

VC

C

GN

D

SE

PA

RA

TIO

N

+2

4V

SU

CK

TIO

N

+2

4V

+2

4V

VC

C

CO

NV

-MO

T

CO

NV

-EN

CD

CT

3pin

AS

17

39

77

-3

CT

3pin

AS

17

39

77

-3

CT

3pin

AS

17

39

77

-3

CT

3pin

AS

17

39

77

-3

CT

6pin

AS

17

39

77

-6

CT

6pin

AS

17

39

77

-6

MC

T24

pin

AS

1-3

53

29

3-2

*2C

T7p

in A

S

17

39

77

-7

CT

3pin

AS

17

39

77

-3

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2

CT

7pin

AS

17

39

77

-7

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2

CT

5pin

AS

17

39

77

-8

CT

5pin

AS

17

39

77

-8

CT

3pin

AS

17

39

77

-3

021-

5050

0

02

1-5

10

22

02

1-5

10

24

02

1-5

10

25

10

11

GN

D

PA

PE

R R

EC

EIV

ING

SE

NS

OR

13 25

(11

)

26

(12

)

27

(13

)

28

(14

)

04

05

02

01

02

01

02

SE

PA

RA

TIO

N F

AN

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2

08

01

06

07

08

04

05

06

02

1-5

10

23

0605

CLA

MP

MO

TO

R012-50023

012-50023

012-50023

012-50023

DRIVE-PCB(CN409)

DRIVE-PCB(CN409)

DRIVE-PCB(CN409)

DRIVE-PCB(CN409)

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2

CT

2pin

AS

17

39

77

-2

(CN

205)

V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V

V VVV VVV V V V V V V VVVVVV V

OBR R

03

01

02

01

03

02

02

1-5

10

53

8)PAPER EJECTION AREA

Page 304: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 10 ]

CT

6pin

AS

1739

77-6

06

05

04

03

02

01

CT

3pin

AS

1739

77-3

MA

ST

ER

LO

AD

ING

UN

IT S

WIT

CH

CT

3pin

AS

1739

77-3

GN

D

OU

TV

CC

01

02

03

MA

ST

ER

EN

D S

EN

SO

RC

T3pin

AS

1739

77-3

GN

DO

UT

VC

C01

02

03

KI1

215-

RK

CT

6pin

AS

1739

77-6

05

06

04

01

03

02

08

07

14

15

16

10

11

12

13

09

20

19

18

17

04

02

03

01

04

01

02

03

CU

TT

ER

MO

TO

R

CU

TT

ER

HO

ME

PO

SIT

ION

SW

04

02

01

03

05

06

CT

6pin

AS

1739

77-6

26(0

6)

25(0

5)24

(04)

23(0

3)22

(02)

21(0

1)

01

03

02

05

04

06

CT

6pin

AS

1739

77-6

29(0

9)

28(0

8)27

(07)

GN

D02

01

VC

CO

UT

KH

0726

03

MA

ST

ER

PO

SIT

ION

ING

SE

NS

OR

LOA

D P

ULS

E M

OT

OR

37(1

7)

34(1

4)

35(1

5)36

(16)

33(1

3)

CT

8pin

AS

1739

77-8

08

06

07

05

04

32(1

2)

31(1

1)

30(1

0)

39(1

9)

38(1

8)

40(2

0)

03

01

02

07

06

02

03

04

01

05

08

02

01

VC

CO

UT

03

GN

DM

AS

TE

R D

ET

EC

TIO

N

SE

NS

OR

02

01

VC

CO

UT

(SH

AR

P)

03

GN

D

TP

H P

RE

SS

UR

E

S

EN

SO

R

TH

ER

MA

L P

RE

SS

UR

E M

OT

OR

01

02

02

01

CT

3pin

AS

1739

77-3

CT

2pin

AS

1739

77-2

CT

2pin

AS

1739

77-2

02

1-5

10

03

02

1-5

10

22

02

1-5

10

41

MA

ST

ER

ST

OC

KE

R U

NIT

MA

ST

ER

LO

AD

ING

UN

IT

CN

20

6

CN

21

2

MA

ST

ER

LO

AD

ING

UN

IT S

W+

5V

GN

D

+5V

MA

ST

ER

EN

D S

EN

SO

RG

ND

+24V

N.C

N.C

+24V

WR

ITE

PU

LS

E M

OT

OR

B

+24V

WR

ITE

PU

LS

E M

OT

OR

A

WR

ITE

PU

LS

E M

OT

OR

A

WR

ITE

PU

LS

E M

OT

OR

B

CU

TT

ER

MO

TO

R-

CU

TT

ER

MO

TO

R+

CU

TT

ER

HO

ME

PO

SIT

ION

SW

GN

D

+24V

+24V

LO

AD

PU

LS

E M

OT

OR

B

LO

AD

PU

LS

E M

OT

OR

A

LO

AD

PU

LS

E M

OT

OR

AL

OA

D P

UL

SE

MO

TO

R B

+5V

MA

ST

ER

PO

SIT

ION

ING

SE

NS

OR

GN

D

TH

ER

MA

L P

RE

SS

UR

E M

OT

OR

+

TH

ER

MA

L P

RE

SS

UR

E M

OT

OR

-

+5V

TP

H P

RE

SS

UR

E S

EN

SO

R

GN

D

+5V

MA

ST

ER

DE

TE

CT

ION

SE

NS

OR

GN

D

GN

DS

PA

RE

+5V

TPH

TPH

ST

B1

CLK

1

TH

ER

MIS

TO

R

CO

DE

1

CO

DE

2

CO

DE

3

CO

DE

402

06

08

07

04

05

03

01

CO

DE

0

11

15

16

+5V

13

14

12

LA

TC

H1

09

10

DA

TA

1G

ND

GN

DG

ND

+5V

+5V

LA

TC

H2

19

DA

TA

4LA

TC

H4

28

27

DA

TA

2

LA

TC

H3

23

CLK

4

ST

B4

DA

TA

3

26

25

24

CLK

3S

TB

321

22

20

CLK

2S

TB

217

18

DE

TA

IL

GP

1A

73A

02

1-5

10

03

SY

ST

EM

-PC

B0

21

-50

50

0

WR

ITE

PU

LS

E M

OT

OR

V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V VV

V VV VVV

01

02

03

03

02

01

ORBR

021-

5105

3

01

03

02

03

01

02

021-

5105

3

Y R O

GP

1A

73A

KH

0726

(HA

MA

MA

TS

U K

OD

EN

)

CN

21

2

BR R O Y GN

BL V GY

W B V BWGY

GN BL

YBR R O GYVBL

GNYRBR O

9)MASTER MAKING AREA

Page 305: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 11 ]

SYSTEM-PCB

CN

207

3-3

53

30

8-8

3 2 1

INT

ER

RU

PT

TY

PE

SE

NS

OR

GP

1A

73

A

CT

3pin

17

39

77

-3

ST

AG

E C

OV

ER

SE

NS

OR

OU

TV

CC

GN

D2 31

1-3

53

29

3-9

*2M

CT

19

pin

*2

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

11

12

10

89 7 56 4

1-1

73

97

7-2

1-1

73

97

7-2

FB

-A12

FB

-OA

FB

-BF

B-C

AF

B-C

B

FB

-OB

10

1197 8

AH

P-S

EN

GN

D

VC

C

64 5

GE

K_

SE

NG

ND

VC

C

31 2

13 246 579 810

12

11

CT

12

pin

CT

12

pin

31 2

51

09

0-0

30

0(M

OL

EX)

31 2

GP

1A

75

E3

INT

ER

RU

PT

TY

PE

SE

NS

OR

VC

CO

UT

GN

D

RE

FL

EC

TIV

ET

YP

E S

EN

SO

RE

Y3A

-1081

VC

CG

ND

OU

T

FL

AT

BE

D R

EA

D P

UL

SE

MO

TO

R

IMA

GE

SC

AN

NE

R A

DF

SH

AD

ING

SE

NS

OR

FL

AT

BE

D O

RIG

INA

L D

ET

EC

TIO

N S

EN

SO

R

32

34

33

123C

N21

1

HIF

3B

A-3

4P

A-2

.54

DS

A

CC

D P

CB

4 652 31

29

(10

)28(9

)

32

(13

)3

1(1

2)

30

(11

)

33

(14

)3

4(1

5)

36

(17

)3

5(1

6)

37

(18

)3

8(1

9)

22(3

)

26(7

)

23(4

)24(5

)25(6

)

27(8

)

20(1

)21(2

)

16(1

)

24(9

)

28

(13

)2

9(1

4)

30

(15

)

25

(10

)

27

(12

)2

6(1

1)

20(5

)21(6

)

23(8

)22(7

)

17(2

)

19(4

)

18(3

)

AH

P-S

EN

GN

D

VC

C

GE

K_

SE

NG

ND

VC

C

FB

-OA

FB

-CB

FB

-CA

FB

-BF

B-A

FB

-OB

GN

D

VC

CO

UT

24

V2

4V

AD

F-A

AD

F-O

A

AD

F-O

BA

DF

-B

VC

CG

ND

OP

S-S

EN

RD

-SE

N

RE

S-S

EN

OU

T-S

EN

OA

DF

-EX

ITA

DF

-SE

N

GN

D

3 12413 6 578912

10

11

15

14

MC

T1

5p

in*2

1-3

53

29

3-5

MC

T1

5p

in*2

1-3

53

29

3-5

GP

1A

75

E:

LIG

HT

BE

AM

BL

OC

KE

D →

LO

W

021-

5104

302

1-51

044

16(1

)

20(5

)

18(3

)17(2

)

19(4

)

21(6

)22(7

)23(8

)24(9

)

26

(11

)2

5(1

0)

27

(12

)

29

(14

)2

8(1

3)

30

(15

)

CT

15

pin

1-1

73

97

7-5

62 4 531 7 11

12

9 10

8 14

15

13

1 9 15

14

13

12

11

10

5 6 872 43

SM

P-0

6V

0N

C(

JST)

PH

R-3

OR

03

KR

-06

S(JS

T)

02

1-5

00

30

OP

TIO

N A

RE

A

021-5

0500

SC

AN

NE

R U

NIT

(30

0D

PI)

(MIR

RO

R C

AR

RIA

GE

TY

PE

)

26

27

28

20

22

21

24

25

23

19

03

LA

MP

NC

18

17

12

14

13

16

15

11

VD

0

DC

LK

GN

DT

RIG

10

09

05

04

07

08

06

/LS

T

/SD

EN

SD

1

01

02

PG

ND

24V

G

DE

TA

IL

33

32

31

30

29

23

24V

34

11

34

30

32

33

31

23

28

29

27

25

26

23

24

22

21

19

20

17

18

15

16

13

14

12

03

07

09

10

08

05

06

04

01

02

NC

SC

LK

SD

0

GN

D

GN

D

VD

1G

ND

VD

2G

ND

VD

3G

ND

VD

4G

ND

VD

5

GN

D

VD

6G

ND

VD

7

5V

5V

GN

D

24V

34

33 32

3 2 1

PH

DR

-34

VS

(JS

T)

B3

4B

-PH

DS

S(J

ST

)

16 235 4

632 541

6芯

FF

C43211 2 3 4

/LA

MP

PG

ND

24

VB

HV

11

HV

12

HV

21

HV

22

SM

P-0

4V

-NC(

JST)

SM

P-0

4V

-NC(

JST)

06

FE

-BT

-VK

-N(

JST)

06

FE

-BT

-VK

-N(

JST)

INV

ER

TE

RF

IP24-1

6N

2-U

2 (N

EC)

LA

MP

CF×

8A

D/3

4H

BL

AM

PC

8A

D/3

4H

B

CN

1

CN

2

61 4 52 3

OR

52

48

4-0

31

0(M

OL

EX)

VV V

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VVV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

VV

V VVV VV

10)SCANNER AREA

Page 306: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 12 ]

SY

ST

EM

-PC

B0

21

-50

50

0

GN

D0

1

02

CC

-LS

T

CA

D-R

Q

CC

-CLK

06

07

08

03

04

05

17

16

CU

NT

-SE

T

CA

D-A

CK

CU

NT

-OP

MA

ST

ER

-CU

NT

5V

TO

TA

L-C

UN

T1

3

12

15

14

09

11

10

CN

21

0

GN

D

CC

-DA

T

N.C

N.C 5V GN

DC

ON

NE

CT

CH

EC

K

112-

5100

211

2-51

001

ST

SO

RT

ER

01

02

03

04 05

06 07

08

CN

1

CN

2

07

06

05

04

03

02

01

02

06

08

07

04

05

03

01

CN

20

1

09

10

JUN

CT

ION

PC

BT

C200-P

CB

CN

20

2

CN

20

3

GN

D

CLU

ST

ER

B

CLU

ST

ER

A5V GN

D

24V

G

N.C

N.C

N.C

HO

LD

ING

SW

MA

NU

AL

SW

MA

IN S

W

01

7-0

00

34

PC

B C

ON

NE

CT

ION

CA

BL

E

CN

204

CN

205

AM

P1-

3539

08-7

JST

JAC

15S

01

02

03

04

06

05

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

16

15

17

07

15

16

17

10

11

09

14

12

13

08

05

04

03

06

02

01

N.C

N.C

TC

P58

6-71

-520

1H

OS

IDE

N

5480

-07A

XM

OLE

X

1-17

2677

-0A

MP

1724

86-2

AM

P

AM

P1-

3539

08-7

CN

20

9

N.C

N.C

11

12

N.C

N.C

09

10

07

08X

HP

12JS

T

03

N.C

06

05

04

N.C

01

02

24V

G

GN

D

GN

D

CLU

ST

ER

B

CLU

ST

ER

A

5V

MOT

MOT

GND

send(-),cut(+)

send(+),cut(-)

FEED/CUT MOTOR

STAMP SOLENOID

stampstamp

solenoid(-)

solenoid(+)

SOL

CN

20

7

CN

21

4

CN

21

3

2-35

3293

-0

HIF

3BA

-40D

-2.5

4RRINC2

CN

21

5

1-35

3293

-5

021-

5104

302

1-51

044

3-35

3308

-81-

3532

93-9

*2

CN

3

AD

F J

UN

CT

ION

PC

B02

1-50

512C

N2

CN

1

38(1

9)

24V

AD

F-A

24V

GN

DA

DF

-*B

AD

F-B

AD

F-*

A

RE

S-S

EN

AD

F-S

EN

*AD

F-E

XIT

GN

D

OU

T-S

EN

*PS

-SE

NR

D-S

EN

VC

C

15

14

04 09

11

13

12

10

08

07

06

05

02

03

01

37(1

8)36

(17)

35(1

6)34

(15)

31(1

2)32

(13)

33(1

4)

28(9

)29

(10)

30(1

1)

21(2

)22

(3)

23(4

)

25(6

)24

(5)

26(7

)27

(8)

20(1

)

07

01

0206

05 03

04

10

11

08

09

15

13

12

14

09 14

10 11

1312

06

05

08

07

03

04

02

01

5106

5-14

00

13

11

12

10

15

16

14

17

19

20

18

LED-RED

GND(CI)

LED-GRN

GDTEN9

VCC(CI)

VCC(CI)

   N.C

   N.C

N.C

N.C

1 3 4 5 7 8 962

PCMD

PSTRDY

N.C

PCRRDY

PWRENB

GND

PSTS

COMENB

GND

CRRDY-

32

31

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

33

27

28

26

30

29

PDATA

N.C

SDATA

N.C

DCLK

HSYNK

VSYNK

HE

N.C

BUSY

N.C

RDCLK

STATUS

STRDY

RHE

13

11

12

10

15

16

14

17

21

19

20

18

25

23

24

22

N.C

CO

NN

EC

T S

IGN

AL

N.C

CMD

PWR

PDATA-

N.C

SDATA-

VSYNK-

HE-

HSYNK-

RDCLK-

BUSY-

DCLK-

N.C

1 3 4 5 7 8 962

STATUS-

RHE-

N.C

STRDY-

  CMD-

   N.C

GND

GND

AD

F R

EA

D P

UL

SE

MO

TO

R

120

20

1 40

1 40

GND(CI)

CRRDY

021-

5105

2

021-

5104

9

06

05

02 03

0401 09

10

1106

05

08

07

02

03

04

01

12

OR

IGIN

AL

IN S

EN

SO

R

AD

F O

RIG

INA

L D

ET

EC

TIO

N S

EN

SO

R(P

AP

ER

DE

TE

CT;L

;L;L

;L

)

AD

F O

RIG

INA

L R

EG

IST

RA

TIO

N S

EN

SO

R(P

AP

ER

DE

TE

CT;H

;H;H

;H

)

OR

IGIN

AL

OU

T S

EN

SO

R (

PA

PE

R D

ET

EC

T;H

;H;H

;H

)

05

06

03

04

02

01

01

03

02 03

02

01 03

02

01

03

02

01

LEVSEN

SGND

≠TV

RGSEN

EPSEN

≠TV

SGND

RDSPT

≠TV

RDSLD

SGND

≠TV≠Q4V

≠Q4VAAB B

A1

B30

5106

5-06

00

1-17

3977

-2

03

0402

06

05 08

07 10

11 13

12

15

14

09

04

01

03 02

06

05

09

08

07

12

11 10

14

13

01

1-17

3977

-51

5

021-

5106

4

01

02

03

01

02

CC

-SU

B P

CB

CN

83

08

12

14

15

13

10

11

09

04

06

07

05

02

03

01

+5V

A01

/MS

TR

CP

A01

GN

D0

50

5

07

06

FG

FG

07

06

N.C

+5V

GN

D/B

ZE

R+

5V+5V

GN

DG

ND

/RX

D

/TX

D

/CR

DA

CK

/CP

/LS

T

+5V

16

CN

820

1

03

04

02

18

17

CN

81

12

15

14

13

09

11

10

16

01

03

04

02

18

17

CN

5

12

14

15

13

10

11

09

CN

1

B10B09

B08

B07

PE

3N

.CPE

2

PE

1

B09

B08

B07

B10

PA

2A

09

CN

2

B06

B05

B04

B03

PE

0

P20

P21

P22

B02

B01

A10

GN

D

GN

D

PA

3

P16

A05

A07

A08

A06

PA

0P

A1

P17

A03

A04

A02

P14

P15

+5V

A09

CN

102

B06

B03 B05

B04

B02

B01

A10

CN

101

A05

A07

A08

A06

A03

A04

A02

CC

-MA

IN P

CB

/G'D

AT

A

/CR

DR

Q

/CN

TO

P

/CN

TS

ET

GN

D

GC

LK

GN

D

08

05

06

07

01

02

03

04

08

07

06

05

04

03

01

02

SG

ND

02

CN

3 /CLD

06

04

05

03

/RD

T

/RC

L

+5V

01

FG

ND

02

06

04

05

03

01

CC

-KE

Y P

CB

10

10

R/W

GN

D1

4

12

13

11

V0

+5VRS

14

12

13

11

02

02

DB

6

06

N.C

08

09

07

N.C E

N.C

04

05

03

DB

4

N.CDB

5

06

08

07

09

04

03

05

01

DB

70

1

LCD

CA

RD

RE

AD

ER

KE

Y/C

AR

D C

OU

NT

ER

11

2-0

00

01

DE

TA

IL

DE

TA

IL

CN

1

CN

2C

N1

CN

2

11)OPTIONS

Page 307: RN Technical Manual

������

������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������

������������������������������������������������������������

��������

������������

����������

���������������

��������������������������������������������

��������������������

���������

������

���������

2.LOCATION OF PCBS

SUB-SW-PCB

PANEL CONTROL PCB

MAIN-SW-PCB

MOTOR CONTROL PCB

INK SENSOR PCB

PRINT DRUM CONTROL

PCB

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

RELAY PCB

ADF-PCB

SYSTEM PCB

RISORINC2

Page 308: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 14 ]

PCB NAME FUNCTION

SYSTEM PCB

PSUNIT(POWER SUPPLYUNIT),PSUNIT 200

DRIVE PCB

PDA ADF(ADF PCB)

PANEL CONTROL PCB

MAIN SW PCB

SUB SW PCB

DRM PCB;BK,DRM PCB;CL

RELAY PCB

POWER SUPPLY UNIT;SC3K

RINC2PCB;64MB

OVERALL CONTROL

SUPPLY ALL VOLTAGES

CONTROL EACH MOTOR

DRIVE FUNCTION OF ADF UNIT

ENTER FUNCTION KEY,CONTROL DISPLAY

ENTER NUMERAL KEY

ENTER SUB PANEL FUNCTION KEY

JUNCTION OF SENSORS ON DRUM PCB

CONTROL RISORINC2

SUPPLY VOLTAGE FOR RISORINC2

CONTROL COMPUTER INTERFACEFUNCTION

MODEL

3.PCB FUNCTION DETAIL

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1:RN2000,RN2030,RN2050,RN2080,RN2100,RN2130,RN2150,RN2180

*2:RN2100,RN2130,RN2150,RN2180

Page 309: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 15 ]

4.SYSTEM PCB

SW1:FREE ROTATION

BT1:BATTERY(CR2450)

CN207

CN

20

9

CN203

CN208 CN212

CN213

CN202

CN204CN205

CN

20

1C

N2

06

CN

21

0

CN211

CN

21

4

SW1BT1

EP-ROM

Page 310: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 16 ]

5.POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CN107

CN 104

VR 302VR 301

CN 105

CN 102

CN 101

F 1

F 6

F 3

F 4

F 2

F 5

CN108

CN105

VR301:TPH THERMAL POWER

ADJUSTMENT NORMAL

VR302:TPH THERMAL POWER

ADJUSTMENT FINE

F1:FUSE 125V 10A

F2:FUSE 125V 3.15A

F3:FUSE 125V 3.15A

F4:FUSE 125V 3.15A

F5:FUSE 125V 8A

F6:FUSE 125V 3.15A

Page 311: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 17 ]

FUSE NO. SYSTEM

F1125V 10A

F2125V 3.15A

F3125V 3.15A

F4125V 3.15A

F5125V 8A

F6125V 3.15A

PHENOMENON•^CONNECTED PARTS

NO POWER

LOCK SOLENOID TOTAL COUNTER MASTER COUNTERPRESSURE SOLENOID PRINT POSITIONING PULSE MOTORPRESSURE CONTROL MOTOR INKING MOTOR

FLAT BED READ PULSE MOTOR ADF READ PULSE MOTORWRITE PULSE MOTOR THERMAL PRESSURE MOTOR PAPERFEED CRUTCH PAPER EJECTION MOTOR CUTTER MOTOR LOADPULSE MOTORMASTER COMPRESSION MOTOR•EMASTER REMOVAL MOTORELEVATOR MOTOR CLAMP MOTOR

OPTIONS

MAIN MOTOR

SEPARATION FAN SUCTION FAN

POWER SUPPLY UNIT FUSE CHART

MAIN

+24VA

+24VB

+24VG

+24VM

+24VC

Page 312: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 18 ]

6.DRIVE PCB

SW1:FREE ROTATION

CN407

CN

40

4

CN403

CN

40

2C

N4

09 CN

40

8C

N4

06

SW1

CN

40

5

CN

40

1

Page 313: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 19 ]

7.PANEL CONTROL PCB

VR1:FOR ADJUST

LCD CONTRASTCN 302

CN

30

5

CN 301

CN307

CN

30

6C

N 3

03

CN

30

4

VR 1

Page 314: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 20 ]

8.PRINT DRUM CONTROL PCB

SW1-5:INK CARTRIDGE SET

SENSOR (BACK OF PCB)CN 502 CN 504

SW 4

CN 503

CN 501

SW 5

SW 1 SW 2

SW 3

CN 502 CN 504CN 503

CN 501

SW 1

SW 2

SW 3

BLACK

COLOR

SW1-5:INK CARTRIDGE SET

SENSOR (BACK OF PCB)

Page 315: RN Technical Manual

DESCRIPTION OF PCBS

[ 19- 21 ]

9.ADF PCB

LED1:READ SENSOR DETECT

VR1:READ SENSOR ADJUST SENSITIVITY

CN 2

CN

1

CN 3

VR 1

LED1

������������������